CN117002343A - Remote notification and adjustment of passenger cabin layout - Google Patents
Remote notification and adjustment of passenger cabin layout Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN117002343A CN117002343A CN202210462900.2A CN202210462900A CN117002343A CN 117002343 A CN117002343 A CN 117002343A CN 202210462900 A CN202210462900 A CN 202210462900A CN 117002343 A CN117002343 A CN 117002343A
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- seat
- arrangement
- seat assembly
- passenger compartment
- assembly
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B60—VEHICLES IN GENERAL
- B60N—SEATS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLES; VEHICLE PASSENGER ACCOMMODATION NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B60N2/00—Seats specially adapted for vehicles; Arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles
- B60N2/002—Seats provided with an occupancy detection means mounted therein or thereon
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B60—VEHICLES IN GENERAL
- B60N—SEATS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLES; VEHICLE PASSENGER ACCOMMODATION NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B60N2/00—Seats specially adapted for vehicles; Arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles
- B60N2/005—Arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles, e.g. dismountable auxiliary seats
- B60N2/01—Arrangement of seats relative to one another
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B60—VEHICLES IN GENERAL
- B60N—SEATS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLES; VEHICLE PASSENGER ACCOMMODATION NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B60N2/00—Seats specially adapted for vehicles; Arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles
- B60N2/02—Seats specially adapted for vehicles; Arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles the seat or part thereof being movable, e.g. adjustable
- B60N2/0224—Non-manual adjustments, e.g. with electrical operation
- B60N2/0244—Non-manual adjustments, e.g. with electrical operation with logic circuits
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B60—VEHICLES IN GENERAL
- B60N—SEATS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLES; VEHICLE PASSENGER ACCOMMODATION NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B60N2/00—Seats specially adapted for vehicles; Arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles
- B60N2/24—Seats specially adapted for vehicles; Arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles for particular purposes or particular vehicles
- B60N2/30—Non-dismountable or dismountable seats storable in a non-use position, e.g. foldable spare seats
- B60N2/3002—Non-dismountable or dismountable seats storable in a non-use position, e.g. foldable spare seats back-rest movements
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B60—VEHICLES IN GENERAL
- B60N—SEATS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLES; VEHICLE PASSENGER ACCOMMODATION NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B60N2/00—Seats specially adapted for vehicles; Arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles
- B60N2/24—Seats specially adapted for vehicles; Arrangement or mounting of seats in vehicles for particular purposes or particular vehicles
- B60N2/30—Non-dismountable or dismountable seats storable in a non-use position, e.g. foldable spare seats
- B60N2/3038—Cushion movements
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Aviation & Aerospace Engineering (AREA)
- Transportation (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Seats For Vehicles (AREA)
Abstract
本公开提供了“乘客舱布置的远程通知和调整”。公开了一种运输系统。所述运输系统包括:车辆;多个座椅总成,所述多个座椅总成定位在所述车辆的乘客舱内并限定布置;多个致动器,所述多个致动器实现所述多个座椅总成的各种部件的移动;多个传感器;以及控制器。公开了预设或预编程布置的具体示例以及定制所述布置的能力。另外,公开了示出各种预设或预编程布置之间的转变的示例性方法。
The present disclosure provides "remote notification and adjustment of passenger cabin layout." A transportation system is disclosed. The transportation system includes: a vehicle; a plurality of seat assemblies positioned and defined within a passenger compartment of the vehicle; and a plurality of actuators enabling movement of various components of the plurality of seat assemblies; a plurality of sensors; and a controller. Specific examples of preset or preprogrammed arrangements are disclosed along with the ability to customize the arrangements. Additionally, exemplary methods are disclosed that illustrate transitions between various preset or preprogrammed arrangements.
Description
技术领域Technical field
本公开总体上涉及车辆。更具体地,本公开涉及车辆的乘客舱内的座椅布置。The present disclosure relates generally to vehicles. More specifically, the present disclosure relates to seating arrangements within the passenger compartment of a vehicle.
背景技术Background technique
车辆的乘客舱通常设置有多个座椅总成。多个座椅总成在乘客舱内的定位可以限定座椅布置。然而,乘客舱设计的现有方法趋向于被限于仅通过移除或收起多个座椅总成中的一者或多者来调整乘客舱的总座椅容量。本公开试图提供乘客舱内的附加布置以及用于执行所述附加布置的方法。The passenger compartment of a vehicle is usually provided with a plurality of seat assemblies. The positioning of the plurality of seat assemblies within the passenger compartment may define the seating arrangement. However, existing approaches to passenger cabin design tend to be limited to adjusting the total seating capacity of the passenger cabin simply by removing or stowing one or more of the multiple seat assemblies. The present disclosure seeks to provide additional arrangements within the passenger compartment and methods for performing said additional arrangements.
发明内容Contents of the invention
根据本发明的第一方面,一种车辆包括乘客舱,所述乘客舱具有前部区域、中心区域、后部区域和下部区域。地板定位在所述乘客舱的所述下部区域中。导轨系统定位在所述地板中并沿着所述车辆的纵向方向延伸。所述导轨系统包括导轨位置传感器。多个座椅总成布置在所述车辆的所述乘客舱中以限定座椅布置。所述多个座椅总成中的每一者包括座椅底座、座椅、座椅靠背和转动总成。所述座椅具有第一端和第二端。所述座椅在所述座椅的所述第二端处可移动地联接到所述座椅底座。座椅位置传感器监测所述座椅的当前位置。所述座椅靠背靠近所述座椅的所述第二端可移动地联接到所述座椅底座。座椅靠背位置传感器监测所述座椅靠背的当前位置。座椅致动器调整所述座椅相对于所述座椅底座的角度位置。座椅靠背致动器调整所述座椅靠背相对于所述座椅底座的角度位置。所述转动总成联接到所述座椅底座。转动致动器与所述转动总成接合使得所述座椅底座可围绕竖直轴线旋转。转动位置传感器监测所述座椅底座围绕所述竖直轴线的旋转位置。平移致动器联接到所述座椅底座并与所述导轨总成接合。所述平移致动器能够调整所述座椅总成沿着所述导轨系统的位置。控制器从所述座椅位置传感器、所述座椅靠背位置传感器、所述转动位置传感器和所述导轨位置传感器接收位置数据,以确定所述多个座椅总成在所述乘客舱内的当前布置。所述控制器将所述多个座椅总成在所述乘客舱内的所述当前布置传送到所述车辆外部的用户界面。According to a first aspect of the invention, a vehicle includes a passenger compartment having a front area, a center area, a rear area and a lower area. A floor is positioned in the lower area of the passenger compartment. A rail system is positioned in the floor and extends along the longitudinal direction of the vehicle. The rail system includes a rail position sensor. A plurality of seat assemblies are arranged in the passenger compartment of the vehicle to define a seating arrangement. Each of the plurality of seat assemblies includes a seat base, a seat, a seat back, and a swivel assembly. The seat has a first end and a second end. The seat is movably coupled to the seat base at the second end of the seat. A seat position sensor monitors the current position of the seat. The seat back is movably coupled to the seat base proximate the second end of the seat. A seat back position sensor monitors the current position of the seat back. A seat actuator adjusts the angular position of the seat relative to the seat base. A seat back actuator adjusts the angular position of the seat back relative to the seat base. The rotating assembly is coupled to the seat base. A rotational actuator engages the rotational assembly such that the seat base is rotatable about a vertical axis. A rotational position sensor monitors the rotational position of the seat base about the vertical axis. A translation actuator is coupled to the seat base and engaged with the rail assembly. The translation actuator is capable of adjusting the position of the seat assembly along the rail system. A controller receives position data from the seat position sensor, the seat back position sensor, the rotation position sensor, and the rail position sensor to determine the position of the plurality of seat assemblies within the passenger compartment. Current layout. The controller communicates the current arrangement of the plurality of seat assemblies within the passenger compartment to a user interface external to the vehicle.
本发明的第一方面的实施例可以包括以下特征中的任一者或其组合:Embodiments of the first aspect of the invention may include any one or combination of the following features:
-所述多个座椅总成中的每一者还包括可移动地联接到所述座椅的所述第一端的小腿支撑件,所述小腿支撑件可在缩回位置与延伸位置之间移动;- Each of the plurality of seat assemblies further includes a calf support movably coupled to the first end of the seat, the calf support being moveable between a retracted position and an extended position. move between;
-小腿支撑件致动器,所述小腿支撑件致动器调整所述小腿支撑件相对于所述座椅的角度位置;以及小腿支撑件位置传感器,所述小腿支撑件位置传感器监测所述小腿支撑件的当前位置;- a calf support actuator that adjusts the angular position of the calf support relative to the seat; and a calf support position sensor that monitors the calf The current position of the support;
-所述用户界面是移动电子装置;- the user interface is a mobile electronic device;
-所述控制器从所述用户界面接收请求信号以将所述乘客舱的所述布置从所述当前布置调整为期望布置;- the controller receives a request signal from the user interface to adjust the arrangement of the passenger compartment from the current arrangement to a desired arrangement;
-将所述乘客舱的所述布置从所述当前布置调整为所述期望布置包括所述控制器传输指令信号以激活从所述多个座椅总成中的至少一者的所述座椅致动器、所述座椅靠背致动器、所述转动致动器和所述平移致动器中选择的至少一个致动器;- adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment from the current arrangement to the desired arrangement includes the controller transmitting a command signal to activate the seat from at least one of the plurality of seat assemblies at least one selected from the group consisting of an actuator, the seat back actuator, the rotation actuator, and the translation actuator;
-从所述当前布置到所述期望布置的所述调整在所述车辆运动时实现;- said adjustment from said current arrangement to said desired arrangement is effected while said vehicle is in motion;
-定位在所述车辆上的占用传感器,其中当所述乘客舱没有乘员时,实现从所述当前布置到所述期望布置的所述调整;- an occupancy sensor positioned on said vehicle, wherein said adjustment from said current arrangement to said desired arrangement is effected when said passenger compartment is empty of occupants;
-所述占用传感器是定位在所述乘客舱的上部区域中的成像器,其中所述成像器的视野朝向所述乘客舱取向;以及- the occupancy sensor is an imager positioned in an upper area of the passenger compartment, wherein the field of view of the imager is oriented towards the passenger compartment; and
-所述占用传感器定位在所述多个座椅总成中的每一者内。- The occupancy sensor is located within each of the plurality of seat assemblies.
根据本公开的第二方面,一种调整车辆的乘客舱布置的方法包括为所述车辆提供第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成,所述第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成各自可移动地联接到所述车辆的所述乘客舱内的导轨系统,所述第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成各自包括座椅和座椅靠背。所述方法还包括利用第一导轨位置传感器检测所述第一座椅总成的第一导轨位置。所述方法还包括利用第一座椅位置传感器检测所述第一座椅总成的所述座椅的第一座椅位置。另外,所述方法包括利用第一座椅靠背位置传感器检测所述第一座椅总成的所述座椅靠背的第一座椅靠背位置。此外,所述方法包括利用第一转动位置传感器检测所述第一座椅总成的第一转动位置。所述方法还包括利用第二导轨位置传感器检测所述第二座椅总成的第二导轨位置。所述方法还包括利用第二座椅位置传感器检测所述第二座椅总成的座椅的第二座椅位置。另外,所述方法包括利用第二座椅靠背位置传感器检测所述第二座椅总成的所述座椅靠背的第二座椅靠背位置。此外,所述方法包括利用第二转动位置传感器检测所述第二座椅总成的第二转动位置。所述方法还包括基于所述第一导轨位置传感器和第二导轨位置传感器、所述第一座椅位置传感器和第二座椅位置传感器、所述第一座椅靠背位置传感器和第二座椅靠背位置传感器以及所述第一转动位置传感器和第二转动位置传感器的检测到的位置来确定所述车辆的所述乘客舱的当前布置。所述方法还包括将所述车辆的所述乘客舱的所述当前布置传送到所述车辆的预期用户的用户界面,所述用户界面在所述车辆的外部。另外,所述方法包括从所述预期用户的所述用户界面接收所述乘客舱的期望布置。According to a second aspect of the present disclosure, a method of adjusting a passenger compartment arrangement of a vehicle includes providing the vehicle with a first seat assembly and a second seat assembly, the first seat assembly and the second seat assembly Seat assemblies are each movably coupled to a rail system within the passenger compartment of the vehicle, and the first and second seat assemblies each include a seat and a seat back. The method also includes detecting a first rail position of the first seat assembly using a first rail position sensor. The method also includes detecting a first seat position of the seat of the first seat assembly using a first seat position sensor. Additionally, the method includes detecting a first seat back position of the seat back of the first seat assembly using a first seat back position sensor. Additionally, the method includes detecting a first rotational position of the first seat assembly using a first rotational position sensor. The method also includes detecting a second rail position of the second seat assembly using a second rail position sensor. The method also includes detecting a second seat position of the seat of the second seat assembly using a second seat position sensor. Additionally, the method includes detecting a second seat back position of the seat back of the second seat assembly using a second seat back position sensor. Additionally, the method includes detecting a second rotational position of the second seat assembly using a second rotational position sensor. The method also includes based on the first rail position sensor and the second rail position sensor, the first seat position sensor and the second seat position sensor, the first seat back position sensor and the second seat The detected positions of the backrest position sensor and the first and second rotational position sensors determine the current arrangement of the passenger compartment of the vehicle. The method also includes communicating the current arrangement of the passenger compartment of the vehicle to a user interface of an intended user of the vehicle, the user interface being external to the vehicle. Additionally, the method includes receiving a desired arrangement of the passenger compartment from the user interface of the intended user.
本公开的第二方面的实施例可以包括以下特征中的任一者或其组合:Embodiments of the second aspect of the disclosure may include any one or combination of the following features:
-利用第一小腿支撑件位置传感器检测所述第一座椅总成的第一小腿支撑件的第一当前小腿支撑件位置;- detecting a first current calf support position of the first calf support of the first seat assembly using a first calf support position sensor;
-利用第二小腿支撑件位置传感器检测所述第二座椅总成的第二小腿支撑件的第二当前小腿支撑件位置;- detecting a second current calf support position of the second calf support of the second seat assembly using a second calf support position sensor;
-将所述乘客舱的布置从所述当前布置调整为所述期望布置;- adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment from the current arrangement to the desired arrangement;
-将所述乘客舱的布置从所述当前布置调整为所述期望布置包括激活从所述第一座椅总成的第一平移致动器、所述第二座椅总成的第二平移致动器、所述第一座椅总成的第一座椅致动器、所述第二座椅总成的第二座椅致动器、所述第一座椅总成的第一座椅靠背致动器、所述第二座椅总成的第二座椅靠背致动器、所述第一座椅总成的第一转动致动器和所述第二座椅总成的第二转动致动器中选择的至少一个致动器;- Adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment from the current arrangement to the desired arrangement includes activating a first translation actuator from the first seat assembly, a second translation actuator from the second seat assembly actuator, first seat actuator of the first seat assembly, second seat actuator of the second seat assembly, first seat of the first seat assembly a seat back actuator, a second seat back actuator of the second seat assembly, a first rotational actuator of the first seat assembly, and a third seat back actuator of the second seat assembly. at least one selected from two rotary actuators;
-从所述当前布置到所述期望布置的所述调整在所述车辆运动时实现;- said adjustment from said current arrangement to said desired arrangement is effected while said vehicle is in motion;
-所述期望布置是所述当前布置;- said desired arrangement is said current arrangement;
-利用定位在所述车辆上的占用传感器检测所述车辆的所述乘客舱的占用状态,并确定在将所述乘客舱的所述布置从所述当前布置转变为所述期望布置之前所述乘客舱没有乘员;- detecting the occupancy status of the passenger compartment of the vehicle using an occupancy sensor positioned on the vehicle and determining the occupancy status of the passenger compartment before transitioning the arrangement of the passenger compartment from the current arrangement to the desired arrangement. The passenger compartment has no occupants;
-所述占用传感器是定位在所述乘客舱的上部区域中的成像器,并且其中所述成像器的视野朝向所述乘客舱取向;以及- the occupancy sensor is an imager positioned in an upper area of the passenger compartment, and wherein the field of view of the imager is oriented towards the passenger compartment; and
所述占用传感器包括定位在所述第一座椅总成内的第一占用传感器和定位在所述第二座椅总成内的第二占用传感器。The occupancy sensor includes a first occupancy sensor positioned within the first seat assembly and a second occupancy sensor positioned within the second seat assembly.
本领域技术人员在研究以下说明书、权利要求和附图后将理解并了解本公开的这些和其他方面、目标和特征。These and other aspects, objects, and features of the present disclosure will be understood and appreciated by those skilled in the art upon study of the following specification, claims, and drawings.
附图说明Description of the drawings
在附图中:In the attached picture:
图1是根据一个示例的车辆的示意图,其示出了用户界面、控制器和多个座椅总成之间的通信;1 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle illustrating communications between a user interface, controllers, and multiple seat assemblies, according to one example;
图2是根据另一个示例的车辆的示意图,其示出了用户界面、控制器和多个座椅总成之间的通信;2 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle illustrating communications between a user interface, controllers, and multiple seat assemblies, according to another example;
图3是根据一个示例的多个座椅总成中的一者的示意图,其示出了座椅总成的部件;3 is a schematic diagram of one of a plurality of seat assemblies showing components of the seat assembly, according to one example;
图4是根据另一个示例的多个座椅总成中的一者的示意图,其示出了座椅总成的部件;4 is a schematic diagram of one of a plurality of seat assemblies showing components of the seat assembly according to another example;
图5是根据一个示例的多个座椅总成中的一者的侧透视图;Figure 5 is a side perspective view of one of the plurality of seat assemblies according to one example;
图6是根据一个示例的车辆的侧透视图,其示出了设计布置;Figure 6 is a side perspective view of a vehicle showing a design arrangement according to one example;
图7是根据一个示例的车辆的侧透视图,其示出了放松布置;7 is a side perspective view of a vehicle showing a relaxed arrangement according to one example;
图8是根据一个示例的车辆的侧透视图,其示出了社交布置;8 is a side perspective view of a vehicle illustrating a social arrangement according to one example;
图9是根据一个示例的车辆的侧透视图,其示出了儿童看护布置;Figure 9 is a side perspective view of a vehicle illustrating a child care arrangement, according to one example;
图10是根据一个示例的车辆的侧透视图,其示出了儿童座椅布置;Figure 10 is a side perspective view of a vehicle illustrating a child seat arrangement according to one example;
图11是根据一个示例的车辆的侧透视图,其示出了入口/出口布置;Figure 11 is a side perspective view of a vehicle showing an inlet/outlet arrangement according to one example;
图12是根据一个示例的车辆的侧透视图,其示出了货物布置;Figure 12 is a side perspective view of a vehicle showing cargo arrangement according to one example;
图13是以通用形式描绘的用于调整乘客舱的布置的过程流程图;Figure 13 is a process flow diagram depicting in general form for adjusting the layout of a passenger compartment;
图14A是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于设计布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;14A is a side view of a passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a design arrangement, according to one example;
图14B是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于放松布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;14B is a side view of the passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a relaxed arrangement, according to one example;
图15是示出根据一个示例的在设计布置与放松布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;Figure 15 is a flowchart illustrating the steps of transitioning between a design arrangement and a relaxed arrangement according to one example;
图16A是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于设计布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;16A is a side view of a passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a design arrangement, according to one example;
图16B是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于社交布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;16B is a side view of a passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a social arrangement, according to one example;
图17是示出根据一个示例的在设计布置与社交布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;17 is a flowchart illustrating the steps of transitioning between a design arrangement and a social arrangement according to one example;
图18A是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于设计布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;18A is a side view of a passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a design arrangement, according to one example;
图18B是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于儿童看护布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;18B is a side view of the passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a child care arrangement, according to one example;
图19是示出根据一个示例的在设计布置与儿童看护布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;19 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between a design arrangement and a child care arrangement, according to one example;
图20A是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于设计布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;20A is a side view of a passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a design arrangement, according to one example;
图20B是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于儿童座椅布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;20B is a side view of the passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a child seat arrangement, according to one example;
图21是示出根据一个示例的在设计布置与儿童座椅布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;21 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between a design arrangement and a child seat arrangement, according to one example;
图22A是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于设计布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;22A is a side view of a passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a design arrangement, according to one example;
图22B是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于入口/出口布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;22B is a side view of a passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in an entrance/exit arrangement, according to one example;
图23是示出根据一个示例的在设计布置与入口/出口布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;23 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between a design arrangement and an inlet/outlet arrangement, according to one example;
图24A是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于设计布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;24A is a side view of a passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a design arrangement, according to one example;
图24B是根据一个示例的乘客舱的侧视图,其示出了处于货物布置的第一座椅总成和第二座椅总成;24B is a side view of the passenger compartment showing the first and second seat assemblies in a cargo arrangement, according to one example;
图25是示出根据一个示例的在设计布置与货物布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;Figure 25 is a flowchart illustrating the steps of transitioning between design layout and cargo layout according to one example;
图26是示出根据一个示例的在儿童看护布置与儿童座椅布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;26 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between a child care arrangement and a child seat arrangement, according to one example;
图27是示出根据一个示例的在儿童看护布置与放松布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;27 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between a child care arrangement and a relaxation arrangement, according to one example;
图28是示出根据一个示例的在儿童座椅布置与放松布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;28 is a flowchart illustrating the steps of transitioning between a child seat arrangement and a relaxation arrangement, according to one example;
图29是示出根据一个示例的在入口/出口布置与儿童看护布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;29 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between an entrance/exit arrangement and a child care arrangement, according to one example;
图30是示出根据一个示例的在货物布置与儿童座椅布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;30 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between a cargo arrangement and a child seat arrangement, according to one example;
图31是示出根据一个示例的在货物布置与放松布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;31 is a flowchart illustrating the steps of transitioning between a cargo arrangement and a relaxed arrangement according to one example;
图32是示出根据一个示例的在社交布置与儿童看护布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;32 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between a social placement and a childcare placement, according to one example;
图33是示出根据一个示例的在社交布置与儿童座椅布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;33 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between a social arrangement and a child seat arrangement, according to one example;
图34是示出根据一个示例的在社交布置与入口/出口布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;34 is a flowchart illustrating steps for transitioning between a social arrangement and an entrance/exit arrangement, according to one example;
图35是示出根据一个示例的在社交布置与放松布置之间转变的步骤的流程图;35 is a flowchart illustrating the steps of transitioning between a social arrangement and a relaxation arrangement, according to one example;
图36是示出根据一个示例的安全过程中的步骤的流程图;Figure 36 is a flowchart illustrating steps in a security process according to one example;
图37是示出根据本公开的调整乘客舱的布置的方法的流程图;37 is a flowchart illustrating a method of adjusting the layout of a passenger compartment according to the present disclosure;
图38是示出根据本公开的调整乘客舱的布置的方法的流程图;38 is a flowchart illustrating a method of adjusting the layout of a passenger compartment according to the present disclosure;
图39是示出根据本公开的调整乘客舱的布置的方法的流程图;39 is a flowchart illustrating a method of adjusting the layout of a passenger compartment according to the present disclosure;
图40是示出根据本公开的调整乘客舱的布置的方法的流程图;40 is a flowchart illustrating a method of adjusting the layout of a passenger compartment according to the present disclosure;
图41是示出根据本公开的调整乘客舱的布置的方法的流程图;41 is a flowchart illustrating a method of adjusting the arrangement of a passenger compartment according to the present disclosure;
图42是示出根据本公开的调整乘客舱的布置的方法的流程图;42 is a flowchart illustrating a method of adjusting the layout of a passenger compartment according to the present disclosure;
图43是示出根据本公开的调整乘客舱的布置的方法的流程图;43 is a flowchart illustrating a method of adjusting the layout of a passenger compartment according to the present disclosure;
图44是示出根据本公开的处理收集的预期用户的图像的方法的流程图;以及44 is a flowchart illustrating a method of processing collected images of intended users in accordance with the present disclosure; and
图45是示出根据本公开的调整乘客舱的布置的方法的流程图。45 is a flowchart illustrating a method of adjusting the layout of a passenger compartment according to the present disclosure.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
出于本文描述的目的,术语“上”、“下”、“右”、“左”、“后”、“前”、“竖直”、“水平”及其派生词应与图6中取向的概念有关。然而,应理解,除非明确地指明为相反,否则所述概念可以呈现各种替代取向。还应理解,附图中示出的以及在以下说明书中描述的特定装置和过程仅仅是所附权利要求中限定的创造性概念的示例性实施例。因此,除非权利要求另外明确地说明,否则涉及本文所公开的实施例的具体尺寸和其他物理特性不应被视为限制性的。For the purposes of this description, the terms "upper", "lower", "right", "left", "rear", "front", "vertical", "horizontal" and their derivatives shall be oriented in the same way as in Figure 6 related to the concept. It is to be understood, however, that the concepts may assume various alternative orientations unless expressly stated to the contrary. It is also to be understood that the specific devices and processes illustrated in the drawings, and described in the following specification, are merely exemplary embodiments of the inventive concepts defined in the appended claims. Therefore, specific dimensions and other physical characteristics related to the embodiments disclosed herein should not be considered limiting unless the claims expressly state otherwise.
当前所示的实施例主要在于与车辆系统相关的方法步骤和设备部件的组合,所述车辆系统能够调整乘客舱布置。因此,设备部件和方法步骤已经在适当的情况下通过附图中的常规符号表示,仅示出了与理解本公开的实施例相关的那些具体细节,以便不会被对受益于本文描述的本领域普通技术人员来说是容易明白的细节混淆了本公开。此外,说明书和附图中相同的附图标记表示相同的元件。The embodiments shown so far consist essentially in a combination of method steps and device components in connection with a vehicle system enabling adjustment of the passenger compartment arrangement. Thus, equipment components and method steps have been denoted, where appropriate, by conventional symbols in the drawings, and only those specific details relevant to an understanding of the embodiments of the present disclosure are shown so as not to be interpreted in a manner that would benefit from the invention described herein. This disclosure is obscured by details that would be readily apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art. Furthermore, the same reference numerals in the specification and drawings refer to the same elements.
如本文所使用,术语“和/或”当用于列出两个或更多个项时表示可以单独地采用所列出的项中的任何一个,或者可以采用所列的项中的两个或更多个项的任何组合。例如,如果组合物被描述为包含组分A、B和/或C,则组合物可以包含:仅A;仅B;仅C;A和B的组合;A和C的组合;B和C的组合;或A、B和C的组合。As used herein, the term "and/or" when used to list two or more items means that any one of the listed items may be employed individually or that both of the listed items may be employed or any combination of more items. For example, if a composition is described as containing components A, B and/or C, the composition may contain: A only; B only; C only; a combination of A and B; a combination of A and C; a combination of B and C combination; or a combination of A, B and C.
在本文件中,关系术语,诸如第一和第二、顶部和底部等,仅用于将一个实体或动作与另一个实体或动作区分开,而不一定要求或暗示此类实体或动作之间的任何实际的这种关系或顺序。术语“包括”、“包含”或它们的任何其他变型意图涵盖非排他性包括,使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、制品或设备不仅包括那些要素,而且可以包括没有明确地列出的或此类过程、方法、制品或设备固有的其他要素。前面有“包括......一个”的要素在没有更多约束的情况下不排除在包括所述要素的过程、方法、制品或设备中存在另外的相同要素。In this document, relational terms, such as first and second, top and bottom, etc., are used only to distinguish one entity or action from another entity or action and do not necessarily require or imply a relationship between such entities or actions. of any actual such relationship or sequence. The terms "comprises," "comprises," or any other variation thereof are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, such that a process, method, article, or apparatus that includes a list of elements not only includes those elements, but may also include those not expressly listed or such Other elements inherent to a process, method, article, or equipment. An element preceded by "comprising a" does not preclude the presence of additional identical elements in a process, method, article, or apparatus including the stated element without further qualification.
如本文所用的术语“约”意指量、大小、配方、参数和其他量及特性不是精确的,也不需要是精确的,而是可根据以下需要为近似的和/或较大些或较小些:反映公差、换算系数、舍入、测量误差等以及本领域技术人员已知的其他因素。当术语“约”用于描述值或范围的端点时,本公开应被理解为包括具体的值或所涉及的端点。无论本说明书中的数值或范围的端点是否叙述“约”,所述数值或范围的端点都意图包括两个实施例:一个由“约”修饰,并且一个不由“约”修饰。还应当理解,范围中的每一个范围的端点在与另一个端点相关以及独立于另一个端点都是显著的。The term "about" as used herein means that quantities, sizes, formulations, parameters and other quantities and characteristics are not, and need not be, precise, but may be approximate and/or larger or smaller as appropriate. Smaller: reflects tolerances, conversion factors, rounding, measurement errors, etc. and other factors known to those skilled in the art. When the term "about" is used to describe a value or an endpoint of a range, the present disclosure should be understood to include the specific value or endpoint referred to. Regardless of whether a numerical value or a range endpoint in this specification recites "about," the numerical value or range endpoint is intended to include two embodiments: one modified by "about" and one not modified by "about." It should also be understood that the endpoint of each range in the range is significant both relative to and independent of the other endpoint.
如本文所用的术语“基本”、“基本上”及其变型意图指明所描述的特征等于或近似等于值或描述。例如,“基本上平坦的”表面意图表示平坦或大致平坦的表面。另外,“基本上”意图表示两个值相等或大致相等。在一些实施例中,“基本上”可以表示值在彼此的约10%以内,诸如在彼此的约5%以内,或者在彼此的约2%以内。The terms "substantially," "substantially," and variations thereof as used herein are intended to indicate that the described feature is equal or approximately equal to the value or description. For example, a "substantially flat" surface is intended to mean a flat or generally flat surface. Additionally, "substantially" is intended to mean that the two values are equal or approximately equal. In some embodiments, "substantially" may mean that values are within about 10% of each other, such as within about 5% of each other, or within about 2% of each other.
除非相反地明确指示,否则如本文所用的术语“所述”、“一个”或“一种”意指“至少一个/种”,并且不应局限于“仅一个/种”。因此,例如,除非上下文另外明确指示,否则对“部件”的引用包括具有两个或更多个此类部件的实施例。Unless expressly indicated to the contrary, the terms "the", "a" or "an" as used herein mean "at least one" and should not be limited to "only one". Thus, for example, reference to "a component" includes embodiments having two or more such components unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.
参考图1和图2,车辆100包括控制器104。在各种示例中,车辆100可以是机动车辆。例如,机动车辆可以是汽车(例如,个人车辆、公共交通等)、飞行器、船只、火车或能够携带乘客和/或货物的任何其他运输模式。虽然在各种示例中被称为机动车辆,但是车辆100不限于作为机车动力源的内燃发动机。更确切地,电动马达、燃料电池、混合动力电动车辆、插电式电动车辆等在本公开的范围内。控制器104包括微处理器108和存储器112。存储器112存储编程的软件程序116,其可由微处理器108执行并用于处理信号和输入以及移动或调整车辆100的部件(例如,各种致动器的位置、用户的舒适度设置、用户的气候设置等等)。根据一个示例,控制器104可以包括诸如呈微处理器108的形式的模拟和/或数字电路。控制器104通信地耦合到用户界面120。在一些示例中,用户界面120可以定位在车辆100上,使得当车辆100改变地理位置时,用户界面120维持与车辆100相同的地理位置(参见图1)。另外或替代地,用户界面120可以被提供作为与车辆100分离并且可以在车辆100外部的部件(参见图2)。例如,用户界面120可以是移动电子装置(例如,用户的个人智能电话、用户的个人计算装置、指定的自助服务终端等等)。在其中用户界面120设置在车辆100上并作为车辆100的单独部件(例如,用户的个人智能电话)两者的示例中,控制器104可以由用户界面120中的任一者访问,使得车辆100的当前用户可以在当前用户占用车辆100时调整与控制器104通信的各种部件,而不限于需要在车载用户界面120的手臂触及范围内。在车辆100上提供用户界面120以及提供用户界面120作为车辆100的外部部件的能力可以为用户提供实现用户的更大访问的冗余度。例如,具有对车辆100外部的用户界面120中的一者的访问权限的用户可以被提供调整车辆100的通信地耦合到控制器104的部件的自由,而无需当前占用车辆100,同时允许无法访问车辆100外部的用户界面120的其他用户(例如,没有个人智能电话的用户)操作车辆100上的用户界面120。控制器104还通信地耦合到多个座椅总成124。多个座椅总成124可以是大于一个座椅总成124的任何数量的座椅总成124,诸如两个或更多个座椅总成124。Referring to FIGS. 1 and 2 , vehicle 100 includes controller 104 . In various examples, vehicle 100 may be a motor vehicle. For example, a motor vehicle may be an automobile (eg, personal vehicle, public transportation, etc.), aircraft, ship, train, or any other mode of transportation capable of carrying passengers and/or cargo. Although referred to as a motor vehicle in various examples, vehicle 100 is not limited to an internal combustion engine as a locomotive power source. Rather, electric motors, fuel cells, hybrid electric vehicles, plug-in electric vehicles, and the like are within the scope of this disclosure. Controller 104 includes microprocessor 108 and memory 112 . Memory 112 stores programmed software programs 116 that are executable by microprocessor 108 and used to process signals and inputs and move or adjust components of vehicle 100 (e.g., positions of various actuators, user's comfort settings, user's climate settings, etc.). According to one example, controller 104 may include analog and/or digital circuitry, such as in the form of microprocessor 108 . Controller 104 is communicatively coupled to user interface 120 . In some examples, user interface 120 may be positioned on vehicle 100 such that when vehicle 100 changes geographic location, user interface 120 maintains the same geographic location as vehicle 100 (see FIG. 1 ). Additionally or alternatively, user interface 120 may be provided as a component separate from vehicle 100 and may be external to vehicle 100 (see Figure 2). For example, user interface 120 may be a mobile electronic device (eg, a user's personal smartphone, a user's personal computing device, a designated self-service terminal, etc.). In examples where user interface 120 is provided both on vehicle 100 and as a separate component of vehicle 100 (eg, the user's personal smartphone), controller 104 may be accessed by either of user interfaces 120 such that vehicle 100 The current user may adjust various components in communication with the controller 104 while the current user is occupying the vehicle 100 without being limited to being within arm's reach of the onboard user interface 120 . The ability to provide user interface 120 on vehicle 100 as well as provide user interface 120 as an external component of vehicle 100 may provide the user with redundancy enabling greater access to the user. For example, a user with access to one of the user interfaces 120 external to the vehicle 100 may be provided the freedom to adjust components of the vehicle 100 communicatively coupled to the controller 104 without currently occupying the vehicle 100 while allowing inaccessibility Other users of user interface 120 external to vehicle 100 (eg, users who do not have a personal smartphone) operate user interface 120 on vehicle 100 . The controller 104 is also communicatively coupled to a plurality of seat assemblies 124 . The plurality of seat assemblies 124 may be any number of seat assemblies 124 greater than one seat assembly 124 , such as two or more seat assemblies 124 .
再次参考图1和图2,通常,用户界面120可以向用户呈现与车辆100的各种部件有关的信息。例如,用户界面120可以向用户呈现与车辆100的各种部件的位置和/或设置有关的信息,所述位置和/或设置可以由控制器104响应于用户做出的动作或请求而调整或移动。车辆100的可以由用户控制或决定的可移动或可调整部件的一个此类示例可以包括调整车辆100的乘客舱的布置。例如,用户界面120可以向用户呈现车辆100的乘客舱的各种预设和/或可定制布置128。当用户选择用户界面120上提供的布置128中的一者时,控制器104可以从用户界面120接收请求信号并传输对应的指令信号以实现由用户选择的布置128。由控制器104传输的指令信号可以导致通过改变多个座椅总成124的各个部件的位置和/或改变多个座椅总成124相对彼此的相对位置来执行对车辆100的乘客舱的布置的调整。由控制器104从用户界面120接收的请求信号可以由微处理器108和/或存储器112执行以实现车辆100的乘客舱的布置128的转变。例如,车辆100的乘客舱可以相对于多个座椅总成124处于第一布置,其中第一布置是预设布置(例如,设计布置、社交布置、货物布置、儿童看护布置、儿童座椅布置、入口/出口装置、放松布置等)。用户可以通过与用户界面120交互来选择多个布置128中的替代布置,所述替代布置可以是预设布置。由于在该特定示例中第一布置和第二布置都是预设布置,因此来自用户界面120的请求信号可以由控制器104的微处理器108接收。接下来,微处理器108可以执行存储在存储器112中的程序116。因此,控制器104可以处理来自用户界面120的请求信号,并通过执行存储在存储器112内的用于进行多个座椅总成124从第一布置到第二布置的调整的程序116来控制这种调整。Referring again to FIGS. 1 and 2 , generally, user interface 120 may present information related to various components of vehicle 100 to a user. For example, user interface 120 may present information to a user regarding the location and/or settings of various components of vehicle 100 , which location and/or settings may be adjusted by controller 104 in response to actions or requests made by the user or move. One such example of a movable or adjustable component of vehicle 100 that may be controlled or determined by a user may include adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment of vehicle 100 . For example, the user interface 120 may present the user with various preset and/or customizable arrangements 128 of the passenger compartment of the vehicle 100 . When a user selects one of the arrangements 128 provided on the user interface 120 , the controller 104 may receive a request signal from the user interface 120 and transmit a corresponding instruction signal to implement the arrangement 128 selected by the user. The command signals transmitted by the controller 104 may cause the arrangement of the passenger compartment of the vehicle 100 to be performed by changing the position of various components of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 and/or changing the relative position of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 relative to each other. adjustment. The request signal received by the controller 104 from the user interface 120 may be executed by the microprocessor 108 and/or the memory 112 to effectuate the transition of the arrangement 128 of the passenger compartment of the vehicle 100 . For example, the passenger compartment of the vehicle 100 may be in a first arrangement relative to the plurality of seat assemblies 124 , where the first arrangement is a preset arrangement (e.g., a design arrangement, a social arrangement, a cargo arrangement, a child care arrangement, a child seat arrangement , entrance/exit devices, relaxation arrangements, etc.). The user may select an alternative arrangement from the plurality of arrangements 128 by interacting with the user interface 120, which alternative arrangement may be a preset arrangement. Since the first arrangement and the second arrangement are both preset arrangements in this particular example, the request signal from the user interface 120 may be received by the microprocessor 108 of the controller 104 . Next, microprocessor 108 may execute program 116 stored in memory 112 . Accordingly, the controller 104 may process the request signal from the user interface 120 and control this by executing a program 116 stored in the memory 112 for adjusting the plurality of seat assemblies 124 from the first arrangement to the second arrangement. kind of adjustment.
进一步参考图1和图2,设想控制器104可以处理从多个传感器和/或数据源接收的信号以确定可能需要激活多个致动器中的哪一者以及可能需要激活致动器的程度,以实现将车辆100的乘客舱置于第二布置中的执行。类似地,控制器104可以处理从多个传感器和/或数据源接收的信号,所述信号用于确定多个座椅总成124中的一者的给定部件的给定移动的授权状态。例如,传感器和/或数据源中的一些传感器和/或数据源可以包括成像器132、导轨传感器136、光学传感器、红外传感器、力传感器(例如,负荷传感器)和/或机器学习,如将在本文中进一步详细讨论。成像器132在被采用时可以被取向成视野朝向乘客舱的区域和/或视野朝向车辆100的外部取向。可以在各种示例中采用一个或多个成像器132(例如,内部观察成像器132和/或外部观察成像器132)。导轨传感器136在被采用时可以向控制器104提供与多个座椅总成124中的每一者沿着导轨系统的位置有关的信息,如将在本文中进一步详细讨论。导轨系统可以定位在乘客舱的地板内。本公开中讨论的用于向控制器104通知车辆100的可以由用户调整或改变的各个部件中的每一者的位置的传感器和/或数据源本质上是示例性的,并且不意图进行限制。更确切地,传感器和/或数据源意图传达在执行对本文公开的车辆100的乘客舱的布置的调整时可以被监测和/或控制的部件类型的说明性示例。With further reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 , it is contemplated that the controller 104 may process signals received from multiple sensors and/or data sources to determine which of multiple actuators may need to be activated and to what extent the actuators may need to be activated. , to achieve execution of placing the passenger compartment of the vehicle 100 in the second arrangement. Similarly, the controller 104 may process signals received from a plurality of sensors and/or data sources for determining an authorization status for a given movement of a given component of one of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 . For example, some of the sensors and/or data sources may include imagers 132, rail sensors 136, optical sensors, infrared sensors, force sensors (eg, load sensors), and/or machine learning, as will be discussed in Discussed in further detail in this article. The imager 132 , when employed, may be oriented with a field of view toward an area of the passenger compartment and/or a field of view oriented toward the exterior of the vehicle 100 . One or more imagers 132 (eg, internal viewing imager 132 and/or external viewing imager 132) may be employed in various examples. The rail sensors 136, when employed, may provide information to the controller 104 regarding the position of each of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 along the rail system, as will be discussed in further detail herein. The rail system can be positioned within the floor of the passenger compartment. The sensors and/or data sources discussed in this disclosure for informing controller 104 of the position of each of the various components of vehicle 100 that may be adjusted or changed by a user are exemplary in nature and are not intended to be limiting. . Rather, the sensors and/or data sources are intended to convey illustrative examples of the types of components that may be monitored and/or controlled when performing adjustments to the arrangement of the passenger compartment of vehicle 100 disclosed herein.
参考图3和图4,多个座椅总成124中的每一者设置有可以通过用户界面120与控制器104之间的交互来控制的各种传感器和致动器。如本文将进一步详细讨论,车辆100的乘客舱140可以设置有定位在第一排144、第二排148和/或第三排152中的多个座椅总成124(参见图6)。可以设想,取决于多个座椅总成124中的一个给定座椅总成在车辆100的乘客舱140内的位置,可以采用更多或更少的传感器和/或致动器。例如,与可以定位在第三排152中的多个座椅总成124中的每一者相比,定位在第一排144和第二排148中的多个座椅总成124中的每一者可以设置有在车辆100的乘客舱140内的更大的移动程度。例如,与第一排144和第二排148相比,第三排152可以竖直升高,使得乘客舱140的地板被轮廓化。在这样的示例中,定位在第三排152内的座椅总成124在空间上可以比第一排144和第二排148中的座椅总成124更受限。在一些示例中,乘客舱140的地板可以是平坦的或更少轮廓化,使得第三排152中的座椅总成124可以设置有与定位在第一排144和第二排148中的座椅总成124相同的移动程度。如图3所示,定位在第一排144和第二排148中的座椅总成124可以各自设置有:占用传感器156,所述占用传感器可以向控制器104通知给定座椅总成124的占用状态;轨道传感器160,所述轨道传感器监测导轨系统的在给定座椅总成124前面和/或后面的区域和/或与导轨传感器136交互以确定座椅总成124的当前导轨位置;和/或授权传感器164,所述授权传感器监测座椅总成124的紧邻附近以确定对座椅总成124的各种部件的移动的阻碍的存在或不存在。在一些示例中,轨道传感器160可以用作授权传感器164。可以设置在定位于第一排144和第二排148中的座椅总成124上的致动器可以包括但不限于座椅靠背致动器168、座椅致动器172、小腿支撑件致动器176、转动致动器180和/或平移致动器184。座椅总成124定位第一排144和第二排148,所述第一排和第二排可以设置有安全装置控件188(例如,座椅安全带卷收器、安全气囊等等)以及舒适特征/设置192(例如,加热表面、通风表面、可调缓冲垫等等)。与定位在第一排144和第二排148中的座椅总成124相比,定位在乘客舱140的第三排152中的座椅总成124可以设置有较少的可调程度。例如,定位在第三排152中的座椅总成124可以包括但不限于占用传感器156、座椅靠背致动器168、座椅致动器172、安全装置控件188和/或舒适特征/设置192。Referring to FIGS. 3 and 4 , each of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 is provided with various sensors and actuators that can be controlled through interaction between the user interface 120 and the controller 104 . As will be discussed in further detail herein, the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 may be provided with a plurality of seat assemblies 124 positioned in the first row 144, the second row 148, and/or the third row 152 (see Figure 6). It is contemplated that more or fewer sensors and/or actuators may be employed depending on the location of a given one of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 within the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 . For example, each of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 positioned in the first row 144 and the second row 148 may be in contrast to each of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 that may be positioned in the third row 152 . One may be provided with a greater degree of movement within the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 . For example, the third row 152 may be raised vertically compared to the first row 144 and the second row 148 such that the floor of the passenger compartment 140 is contoured. In such examples, the seat assembly 124 positioned within the third row 152 may be more spatially constrained than the seat assemblies 124 in the first row 144 and the second row 148 . In some examples, the floor of the passenger compartment 140 may be flat or less contoured such that the seat assemblies 124 in the third row 152 may be provided with seats positioned in the first row 144 and the second row 148 . The chair assembly 124 has the same degree of movement. As shown in FIG. 3 , the seat assemblies 124 positioned in the first row 144 and the second row 148 may each be provided with an occupancy sensor 156 that may notify the controller 104 of the given seat assembly 124 occupancy status; track sensors 160 that monitor areas of the track system in front and/or behind a given seat assembly 124 and/or interact with track sensors 136 to determine the current track position of the seat assembly 124 ; and/or authorization sensors 164 that monitor the immediate vicinity of the seat assembly 124 to determine the presence or absence of obstructions to movement of various components of the seat assembly 124 . In some examples, track sensor 160 may serve as authorization sensor 164 . Actuators that may be provided on the seat assemblies 124 positioned in the first row 144 and the second row 148 may include, but are not limited to, seat back actuators 168 , seat actuators 172 , calf supports, etc. actuator 176, rotational actuator 180 and/or translational actuator 184. The seat assembly 124 positions first and second rows 144 and 148 , which may be provided with safety device controls 188 (e.g., seat belt retractors, airbags, etc.) and comfort controls 188 . Features/Settings 192 (eg, heated surfaces, ventilated surfaces, adjustable cushioning, etc.). Seat assemblies 124 positioned in the third row 152 of the passenger compartment 140 may be provided with less adjustability than seat assemblies 124 positioned in the first row 144 and second row 148 . For example, the seat assembly 124 positioned in the third row 152 may include, but is not limited to, occupancy sensors 156 , seatback actuators 168 , seat actuators 172 , safety device controls 188 , and/or comfort features/settings 192.
现在参考图5,示出了根据各种示例的多个座椅总成124中的一者。座椅总成124包括头枕196、座椅靠背200和座椅204。在一些示例中,座椅总成124还可以包括小腿支撑件208(参见图7),如将在本文中进一步详细讨论。头枕196可以悬挂在座椅靠背200上方。更具体地,座椅总成124包括可以沿着座椅靠背200的向后表面延伸的座椅靠背支撑构件212,其中座椅靠背200与座椅靠背支撑构件212的相邻表面随着从座椅靠背200的下部216到座椅靠背200的上部220的距离的增加而彼此偏离。座椅靠背支撑构件212包括头枕支撑管224,所述头枕支撑管在座椅靠背200的上部220上方竖直延伸。头枕196可以联接到头枕支撑管224,使得头枕196悬挂在座椅靠背200的上部220上方,而头枕196不与座椅靠背200的上部220物理接触。在一些示例中,头枕196、座椅靠背支撑构件212和头枕支撑管224可以各自不与座椅靠背200的上部220接合。Referring now to FIG. 5 , one of a plurality of seat assemblies 124 is shown according to various examples. The seat assembly 124 includes a headrest 196 , a seat back 200 and a seat 204 . In some examples, the seat assembly 124 may also include a calf support 208 (see FIG. 7 ), as will be discussed in further detail herein. The headrest 196 may be suspended above the seat back 200 . More specifically, the seat assembly 124 includes a seat back support member 212 that may extend along a rearward surface of the seat back 200 , wherein adjacent surfaces of the seat back 200 and the seat back support member 212 follow the seat back 212 . The lower portion 216 of the seat back 200 and the upper portion 220 of the seat back 200 are offset from each other as the distance increases. The seat back support member 212 includes a headrest support tube 224 that extends vertically above the upper portion 220 of the seat back 200 . The headrest 196 may be coupled to the headrest support tube 224 such that the headrest 196 hangs above the upper portion 220 of the seatback 200 without the headrest 196 being in physical contact with the upper portion 220 of the seatback 200 . In some examples, headrest 196 , seatback support member 212 , and headrest support tube 224 may each not engage upper portion 220 of seatback 200 .
再次参考图5,座椅总成124包括座椅底座228。座椅靠背200、座椅204和座椅靠背支撑构件212各自联接到座椅底座228。座椅靠背200靠近座椅靠背200的下部216联接到座椅底座228。座椅靠背200可移动地联接到座椅底座228,使得座椅靠背200可以围绕座椅靠背旋转轴线232旋转或枢转。座椅204包括第一端236和第二端240。座椅204在座椅204的第二端240处联接到座椅底座228。座椅204可移动地联接到座椅底座228,使得座椅204可围绕座椅旋转轴线244枢转或旋转。座椅204与座椅底座228的可枢转或可旋转联接允许座椅204可在向上收起位置(参见图9、图11和图12)与向下展开位置之间移动,如此处所描绘。座椅204在向上收起位置与向下展开位置之间的移动可以被称为体育场式座椅。座椅底座228可以包括支架248,所述支架定位在座椅总成124的侧面上。座椅靠背200和座椅204分别在座椅靠背联接点252和座椅联接点256处安装到支架248。座椅靠背联接点252可以限定座椅靠背旋转轴线232。类似地,座椅联接点256可以限定座椅旋转轴线244。在各种示例中,座椅总成124可以包括转动总成260。转动总成260可以在转动联接点264处安装到座椅底座228的支架248。转动总成260可以是具有上环和下环的同心环设计,当转动总成260旋转时,上环与座椅204一起围绕竖直轴线268旋转,下环联接到转动平台272并且随着转动总成260围绕竖直轴线268旋转,下环保持静止。Referring again to FIG. 5 , the seat assembly 124 includes a seat base 228 . Seat back 200 , seat 204 , and seat back support member 212 are each coupled to seat base 228 . Seat back 200 is coupled to seat base 228 proximate a lower portion 216 of seat back 200 . Seat back 200 is movably coupled to seat base 228 such that seat back 200 can rotate or pivot about seat back rotation axis 232 . Seat 204 includes first end 236 and second end 240 . Seat 204 is coupled to seat base 228 at second end 240 of seat 204 . Seat 204 is movably coupled to seat base 228 such that seat 204 can pivot or rotate about seat rotation axis 244 . The pivotable or rotatable coupling of the seat 204 to the seat base 228 allows the seat 204 to be moveable between an upwardly stowed position (see Figures 9, 11, and 12) and a downwardly deployed position, as depicted herein. The movement of the seat 204 between the stowed upward position and the deployed downward position may be referred to as stadium seating. The seat base 228 may include brackets 248 positioned on the sides of the seat assembly 124 . Seat back 200 and seat 204 are mounted to bracket 248 at seat back attachment point 252 and seat attachment point 256, respectively. Seat back attachment point 252 may define seat back rotation axis 232 . Similarly, seat attachment point 256 may define seat rotation axis 244 . In various examples, seat assembly 124 may include rotation assembly 260 . The rotational assembly 260 may be mounted to the bracket 248 of the seat base 228 at the rotational coupling point 264 . The rotating assembly 260 may be a concentric ring design with an upper ring and a lower ring. When the rotating assembly 260 rotates, the upper ring rotates with the seat 204 about the vertical axis 268 and the lower ring is coupled to the rotating platform 272 and rotates as the rotating assembly 260 rotates. The assembly 260 rotates about the vertical axis 268 while the lower ring remains stationary.
进一步参考图5,座椅总成124包括:座椅靠背位置传感器276,所述座椅靠背位置传感器监测座椅靠背200的当前位置;座椅位置传感器280,所述座椅位置传感器监测座椅204的当前位置;以及转动位置传感器284,所述转动位置传感器监测转动总成260围绕竖直轴线268的旋转位置。座椅总成124还包括:座椅靠背致动器168,所述座椅靠背致动器可以调整座椅靠背200相对于座椅底座228的角度位置;座椅致动器172,所述座椅致动器可以调整座椅204相对于座椅底座228的角度位置;以及转动致动器,所述转动致动器联接到转动总成260使得转动总成260以及最终座椅总成124可围绕竖直轴线268旋转。可以设想,座椅靠背致动器168、座椅致动器172和转动致动器296可以各自设置有它们的对应位置传感器(分别为座椅靠背位置传感器276、座椅位置传感器280和转动位置传感器284)作为其中的集成部件。在一些示例中,座椅总成124可以设置有小腿支撑件致动器176,所述小腿支撑件致动器调整小腿支撑件208相对于座椅204的角度取向,其中小腿支撑件208可在缩回位置与延伸位置之间操作。各种致动器(例如,座椅致动器172、座椅靠背致动器168、转动致动器180和/或小腿支撑件致动器176)可以设置有结合在其中或以其他方式与其相关联以跟踪致动器的当前位置和/或监测致动器的移动使得控件104可以确定何时应停止致动的传感器。传感器可以包括但不限于霍尔效应传感器和纹波计数器。With further reference to FIG. 5 , the seat assembly 124 includes a seat back position sensor 276 that monitors the current position of the seat back 200 , a seat position sensor 280 that monitors the seat position. 204; and a rotational position sensor 284 that monitors the rotational position of the rotational assembly 260 about the vertical axis 268. The seat assembly 124 also includes: a seat back actuator 168 that can adjust the angular position of the seat back 200 relative to the seat base 228; a seat actuator 172 that can adjust the seat back 200 relative to the seat base 228; a chair actuator that can adjust the angular position of the seat 204 relative to the seat base 228; and a rotational actuator that is coupled to the rotational assembly 260 such that the rotational assembly 260 and ultimately the seat assembly 124 can Rotation about vertical axis 268. It is contemplated that seat back actuator 168 , seat actuator 172 , and rotation actuator 296 may each be provided with their corresponding position sensors (seat back position sensor 276 , seat position sensor 280 , and rotation position sensor, respectively). Sensor 284) as an integrated component therein. In some examples, the seat assembly 124 may be provided with a calf support actuator 176 that adjusts the angular orientation of the calf support 208 relative to the seat 204 , wherein the calf support 208 may be in Operates between retracted and extended positions. Various actuators (e.g., seat actuator 172, seat back actuator 168, rotation actuator 180, and/or calf support actuator 176) may be provided with integrated therein or otherwise with Sensors associated to track the current position of the actuator and/or monitor the movement of the actuator so that the control 104 can determine when actuation should cease. Sensors may include, but are not limited to, Hall effect sensors and ripple counters.
现在参考图6至图12,车辆100的乘客舱140可以以各种布置放置。可以关于前部区域300、中心区域304和后部区域308来讨论车辆100的乘客舱140。通常,特别是当多个座椅总成124布置在设计位置中时(参见图6),第一排144与前部区域300相对应,第二排148与中心区域304相对应,并且第三排152与后部区域308相对应。乘客舱140的前部区域300和中心区域304可以各自设置有将乘客舱140与车辆外部环境分开的一个或多个通道门312。类似地,通道门312中的一者可以设置在车辆100的后部,诸如可以由定位在第三排152中的座椅总成124利用的举升式车门。通道门312可在打开位置与关闭位置之间移动,由此允许乘员和/或货物进入和/或离开。乘客舱140包括导轨系统316,所述导轨系统定位在车辆100的地板320中。导轨系统316可以设置有电力线和/或数据线,使得可以将电力传输到座椅总成124,并且可以在座椅总成124与车辆100(例如,控制器104)之间传送数据。另外或替代地,可以在座椅总成124之间传输数据。车辆100的地板320定位在乘客舱140的下部区域中。导轨系统316包括沿着车辆100的纵向方向328延伸的多个轨道324。轨道324可以沿着纵向方向328成对布置,其中每对轨道324使得联接到其的多个座椅总成124中的一者或多者能够在纵向方向328上沿着轨道324被致动。例如,第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336可以联接到第一对轨道324。类似地,第三座椅总成340和第四座椅总成344可以联接到第二对轨道324。如图6中描绘,第一对轨道324定位在车辆100的最近侧,而第二对轨道324定位在车辆100的远侧。虽然定位在车辆100的最近侧的座椅总成124主要被描绘为具有座椅靠背致动器168、座椅致动器172、小腿支撑件致动器176、转动致动器180和/或平移致动器184,但是本领域技术人员将认识到,乘客舱140内的其余座椅总成124可以设置有本文列举的一些或全部部件。Referring now to FIGS. 6-12 , the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 may be placed in various arrangements. Passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 may be discussed with respect to front area 300 , center area 304 , and rear area 308 . Typically, particularly when multiple seat assemblies 124 are arranged in a design position (see FIG. 6 ), the first row 144 corresponds to the front area 300 , the second row 148 corresponds to the center area 304 , and the third row 144 corresponds to the center area 304 . Row 152 corresponds to rear region 308 . The front region 300 and the center region 304 of the passenger compartment 140 may each be provided with one or more access doors 312 that separate the passenger compartment 140 from the vehicle's exterior environment. Similarly, one of the access doors 312 may be provided in the rear of the vehicle 100 , such as a liftgate that may be utilized by the seat assembly 124 positioned in the third row 152 . The access door 312 is moveable between an open position and a closed position, thereby allowing entry and/or egress of occupants and/or cargo. The passenger compartment 140 includes a rail system 316 positioned in the floor 320 of the vehicle 100 . Rail system 316 may be provided with power lines and/or data lines so that power can be transmitted to seat assembly 124 and data can be communicated between seat assembly 124 and vehicle 100 (eg, controller 104). Additionally or alternatively, data may be transmitted between seat assemblies 124 . Floor 320 of vehicle 100 is positioned in a lower area of passenger compartment 140 . Rail system 316 includes a plurality of rails 324 extending along the longitudinal direction 328 of vehicle 100 . The rails 324 may be arranged in pairs along the longitudinal direction 328 , with each pair of rails 324 enabling one or more of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 coupled thereto to be actuated along the rails 324 in the longitudinal direction 328 . For example, first seat assembly 332 and second seat assembly 336 may be coupled to a first pair of rails 324 . Similarly, the third seat assembly 340 and the fourth seat assembly 344 may be coupled to the second pair of rails 324 . As depicted in FIG. 6 , a first pair of rails 324 is positioned on the proximal side of the vehicle 100 while a second pair of rails 324 is positioned on the far side of the vehicle 100 . Although the seat assembly 124 positioned proximally of the vehicle 100 is primarily depicted as having a seat back actuator 168 , a seat actuator 172 , a calf support actuator 176 , a rotation actuator 180 and/or translation actuator 184, but those skilled in the art will recognize that the remainder of the seat assembly 124 within the passenger compartment 140 may be provided with some or all of the components enumerated herein.
再次参考图6至图12,多个座椅总成124定位在车辆100的乘客舱140内以限定座椅布置。本文讨论的各种致动器和传感器使得车辆100的控制器104能够影响多个座椅总成124的调整,以实现乘客舱140内的各种座椅布置。座椅底座228与导轨系统316接合。例如,座椅底座228可以通过转动总成260(例如,从转动总成260向下延伸的锚接件334)与导轨系统316接合。更具体地,转动总成260的下部可以与导轨系统316接合,而转动总成260的上部与座椅底座228接合。因此,座椅总成124与导轨系统316之间的联接可以实现座椅总成124沿着导轨系统316的平移运动,同时还允许座椅总成124通过转动总成260围绕竖直轴线268旋转。导轨系统316可以设置有一个或多个导轨传感器136。当在导轨系统316内采用多个导轨传感器136时,控制器104可能够通过参考多个导轨传感器136来监测多个座椅总成124中的每一者的当前位置。例如,控制器104可能能够确定第一座椅总成332定位在导轨传感器136中的第一导轨传感器与导轨传感器136中的第二导轨传感器之间,并且第二座椅总成336定位在导轨传感器136中的第三导轨传感器与导轨传感器136中的第四导轨传感器之间。在这样的示例中,导轨传感器136可以用作“位置门”,所述位置门可以用于传送多个座椅总成124中的一个给定座椅总成已经过导轨传感器136中的一者但尚未经过导轨传感器136中的一个紧邻导轨传感器。在各种示例中,导轨传感器136可以是地板320和/或轨道324内的磁体。在此类示例中,座椅总成124可以设置有霍尔效应传感器,所述霍尔效应传感器被定位和/或配置为与磁性导轨传感器136交互,由此使得控制器104能够确定座椅总成124与一个或多个导轨传感器136的接近度。Referring again to FIGS. 6-12 , a plurality of seat assemblies 124 are positioned within the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 to define a seating arrangement. The various actuators and sensors discussed herein enable the controller 104 of the vehicle 100 to affect the adjustment of multiple seat assemblies 124 to achieve various seating arrangements within the passenger compartment 140 . The seat base 228 is engaged with the rail system 316 . For example, the seat base 228 may be engaged with the rail system 316 via the pivot assembly 260 (eg, anchors 334 extending downwardly from the pivot assembly 260). More specifically, the lower portion of the rotation assembly 260 may engage the rail system 316 while the upper portion of the rotation assembly 260 engages the seat base 228 . Therefore, the coupling between the seat assembly 124 and the rail system 316 allows for translational movement of the seat assembly 124 along the rail system 316 while also allowing the seat assembly 124 to rotate about the vertical axis 268 via the rotation assembly 260 . The rail system 316 may be provided with one or more rail sensors 136 . When multiple rail sensors 136 are employed within the rail system 316 , the controller 104 may be able to monitor the current position of each of the multiple seat assemblies 124 by referencing the multiple rail sensors 136 . For example, the controller 104 may be able to determine that the first seat assembly 332 is positioned between a first of the rail sensors 136 and a second of the rail sensors 136 and that the second seat assembly 336 is positioned between the rails. Between the third rail sensor among the sensors 136 and the fourth rail sensor among the rail sensors 136 . In such an example, the rail sensor 136 may serve as a "position gate" that may be used to communicate that a given one of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 has passed one of the rail sensors 136 But it has not yet passed one of the rail sensors 136 that is immediately adjacent to the rail sensor. In various examples, rail sensors 136 may be magnets within floor 320 and/or rails 324 . In such examples, the seat assembly 124 may be provided with a Hall effect sensor positioned and/or configured to interact with the magnetic rail sensor 136 , thereby enabling the controller 104 to determine the seat assembly. Proximity 124 to one or more rail sensors 136 .
进一步参考图6至图12,可以设想,成像器132可以被定取向成视野指向乘客舱140,使得成像器132可以用于(例如,通过识别座椅总成124的形状、通过识别座椅总成124上的QR代码等等)确定多个座椅总成124的当前位置。通过将座椅靠背200、座椅204和转动总成260联接到公共部件(诸如座椅底座228),可以实现座椅总成124的各种部件的更大移动自由度。更具体地,转动总成260的下部与导轨系统316的轨道324接合。因此,转动总成260的下部围绕竖直轴线268旋转地固定,但是能够沿着导轨系统316平移运动。转动总成260的上部与座椅底座228接合或联接,同时维持座椅底座228不与转动总成260的下部直接接合。因此,由于转动总成260的致动,允许座椅底座228围绕竖直轴线268旋转。座椅204与座椅底座228的联接还实现座椅204的更大移动自由度。更具体地,座椅204以将座椅204悬挂在支架248之间同时维持座椅204不与转动总成260直接接合的方式联接到座椅底座228的支架248。因此,座椅204可围绕座椅旋转轴线244旋转,并且可在向上收起位置(参见图9)与向下展开位置(参见图6)之间移动。类似于座椅204,座椅靠背200以允许座椅靠背200围绕座椅靠背旋转轴线232的旋转运动的方式联接到座椅底座228。更具体地,座椅靠背200悬挂在座椅底座228的支架248之间,使得座椅靠背200不与座椅204直接接合。因此,座椅靠背200、座椅204和转动总成260中的每一者与座椅底座228的支架248的独立联接允许座椅204独立于转动总成260围绕竖直轴线268的旋转位置在向上收起位置与向下展开位置之间致动。平移致动器184可以允许平移致动器184(例如,通过延伸到轨道324中的一个或多个锚接件334)与导轨系统316接合的方式联接到转动总成260的下部(例如,转动平台272)。控制器104对平移总成的激活使得能够沿着导轨系统316调整座椅总成124中的一个对应座椅总成的位置。With further reference to FIGS. 6-12 , it is contemplated that the imager 132 may be oriented with the field of view directed toward the passenger compartment 140 such that the imager 132 may be used (e.g., by identifying the shape of the seat assembly 124 , by identifying the shape of the seat assembly 124 QR code on the seat assembly 124, etc.) to determine the current position of the plurality of seat assemblies 124. By coupling the seat back 200 , seat 204 , and swivel assembly 260 to common components, such as the seat base 228 , greater freedom of movement of the various components of the seat assembly 124 may be achieved. More specifically, the lower portion of the rotating assembly 260 engages the rails 324 of the rail system 316 . Thus, the lower portion of the rotating assembly 260 is rotationally fixed about the vertical axis 268 but is capable of translational movement along the guide rail system 316 . The upper portion of the rotating assembly 260 is engaged or connected with the seat base 228 while maintaining the seat base 228 not directly engaged with the lower portion of the rotating assembly 260 . Thus, seat base 228 is allowed to rotate about vertical axis 268 due to actuation of rotation assembly 260 . The coupling of the seat 204 to the seat base 228 also allows greater freedom of movement of the seat 204. More specifically, the seat 204 is coupled to the brackets 248 of the seat base 228 in a manner that suspends the seat 204 between the brackets 248 while maintaining the seat 204 from direct engagement with the rotating assembly 260 . Accordingly, the seat 204 is rotatable about the seat rotation axis 244 and movable between an upwardly stowed position (see Figure 9) and a downwardly deployed position (see Figure 6). Similar to the seat 204 , the seat back 200 is coupled to the seat base 228 in a manner that allows rotational movement of the seat back 200 about the seat back rotation axis 232 . More specifically, the seat back 200 is suspended between brackets 248 of the seat base 228 such that the seat back 200 is not directly engaged with the seat 204 . Thus, the independent coupling of each of the seat back 200 , seat 204 , and swivel assembly 260 to the bracket 248 of the seat base 228 allows the seat 204 to rotate independently of the rotational position of the swivel assembly 260 about the vertical axis 268 . Activate between the stowed upward position and the deployed downward position. The translation actuator 184 may be coupled to a lower portion of the rotation assembly 260 (e.g., via one or more anchors 334 extending into the track 324 ) to engage the rail system 316 Platform 272). Activation of the translation assembly by the controller 104 enables adjustment of the position of a corresponding one of the seat assemblies 124 along the rail system 316 .
具体地参考图6,多个座椅总成124被描绘为处于车辆100的乘客舱140内的设计布置。多个座椅总成124的设计布置可以被限定为乘客舱140内的多个座椅总成124中的每一者被取向成面向前取向,其中座椅总成124中的每一者的座椅204处于向下展开位置,并且座椅总成124中的每一者的座椅靠背200处于大致直立位置。在所描绘的设计布置中,座椅总成124中的每一者以座椅总成124中的每一者可以被乘员利用的方式进行布置和定位。如所描绘的,定位在第一排144中的座椅总成124可以完全容纳在乘客舱140的前部区域300内,定位在第二排148中的座椅总成124可以完全容纳在乘客舱140的中心区域304内,并且定位在第三排152中的座椅总成124可以完全容纳在乘客舱140的后部区域308内。当乘客舱设置有处于设计布置的座椅布置时,乘客舱140的座椅容量可以被最大化,因为座椅总成124中的每一者都能够接收乘员。在一些示例中,乘客舱140的设计布置可以使乘客舱140的总货物容量最小化。Referring specifically to FIG. 6 , a plurality of seat assemblies 124 are depicted in a design arrangement within the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 . The design arrangement of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 may be defined such that each of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 within the passenger compartment 140 is oriented in a forward-facing orientation, wherein each of the seat assemblies 124 The seats 204 are in a deployed-down position and the seat backs 200 of each of the seat assemblies 124 are in a generally upright position. In the design arrangement depicted, each of the seat assemblies 124 is arranged and positioned in a manner such that each of the seat assemblies 124 can be utilized by an occupant. As depicted, the seat assembly 124 positioned in the first row 144 may be fully contained within the forward region 300 of the passenger compartment 140 and the seat assembly 124 positioned in the second row 148 may be fully contained within the passenger compartment. The seat assembly 124 located within the central region 304 of the cabin 140 and positioned in the third row 152 may be fully contained within the rear region 308 of the passenger compartment 140 . When the passenger compartment is provided with the seating arrangement in the designed arrangement, the seating capacity of the passenger compartment 140 may be maximized because each of the seat assemblies 124 is capable of receiving an occupant. In some examples, the design arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 may minimize the total cargo capacity of the passenger compartment 140 .
具体地参考图7,车辆100的乘客舱140被描绘为处于放松布置。放松布置可以被限定为放置在大致倾斜和升高位置的座椅总成124中的至少一者(在所描绘的示例中为第一座椅总成332)。更具体地,在放松布置中,座椅总成124中的至少一者将座椅靠背200置于倾斜位置,将小腿支撑件208从缩回位置升高到延伸位置,和/或以与设计位置(参见图6)相比增加座椅204相对于车辆100的地板320的倾斜角度的方式调整座椅204相对于座椅底座228的角度位置。当处于放松布置时,置于倾斜和升高位置的座椅总成124可能侵占座椅总成中的一个后面紧邻座椅总成(例如,在所描绘的示例中为第二座椅总成336)的座椅区域。可以独立于后面紧邻的座椅总成124的座椅204的位置为座椅总成124中的一者实现放松布置。例如,第一座椅总成332可以独立于第二座椅总成336的座椅204是处于向下展开位置(如图所描绘)还是处于向上收起位置而被置于放松布置或倾斜和升高位置。乘员可能希望在前往其期望目的地的途中利用放松布置来放松、休息和/或补充其能量水平。虽然出于说明目的将第一座椅总成332描绘为具有小腿支撑件208,但是可以设想,小腿支撑件208可以设置在乘客舱140内的座椅总成124中的每一者上。Referring specifically to FIG. 7 , the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 is depicted in a relaxed arrangement. The relaxed arrangement may be defined as at least one of the seat assemblies 124 (in the depicted example, the first seat assembly 332 ) placed in a generally reclined and raised position. More specifically, in the relaxed configuration, at least one of the seat assemblies 124 places the seat back 200 in a reclined position, raises the calf support 208 from a retracted position to an extended position, and/or in a manner consistent with the design. Position (see FIG. 6 ) adjusts the angular position of the seat 204 relative to the seat base 228 in a manner that increases the inclination angle of the seat 204 relative to the floor 320 of the vehicle 100 . When in the relaxed arrangement, the seat assembly 124 in the reclined and raised position may encroach upon one of the seat assemblies immediately behind the seat assembly (e.g., the second seat assembly in the depicted example). 336) seating area. The relaxed arrangement may be achieved for one of the seat assemblies 124 independently of the position of the seat 204 of the immediately rear seat assembly 124 . For example, the first seat assembly 332 may be placed in a relaxed configuration or in a reclined and Elevated position. Occupants may wish to utilize relaxation arrangements to relax, rest and/or replenish their energy levels en route to their desired destination. Although the first seat assembly 332 is depicted as having the calf support 208 for illustrative purposes, it is contemplated that the calf support 208 may be provided on each of the seat assemblies 124 within the passenger compartment 140 .
具体地参考图8,乘客舱140被描绘为处于社交布置。社交布置可以被限定为将座椅总成124中的一者置于面向后取向,使得座椅总成124面向座椅总成124中的处于车辆100的后面紧邻排中的另一个座椅总成,其中座椅总成124中的一个后面相邻座椅总成定位于面向前取向。例如,第一座椅总成332可以被置于面向后取向,使得第一座椅总成332的乘员可以面向第二座椅总成336的乘员,其中第二座椅总成336被定位在第二排148中并被取向成面向前取向。当第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的乘员现在面向彼此时,乘员中的每一者的腿将占用第一座椅总成332与第二座椅总成336之间的公共空间。因此,为了为第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的乘员提供附加的搁脚空间,可能有益的是将第一座椅总成332朝向导轨系统316的最前方致动,使得第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200的后部部分靠近车辆100的仪表板348。当乘客舱140处于社交布置时,面后向座椅总成124(例如,第一座椅总成332)和定位在面后向座椅总成124的车辆向后的座椅总成124(例如,第二座椅总成336和第三座椅总成340)的乘员可以更容易地彼此交流。例如,当乘客舱140被布置处于设计布置时,第二排148的乘员可能难以听到第一排144的乘员所说的话。这可能部分地是由于离开第一排144的乘员的嘴部的声波向第一排144的车辆前方行进并最终远离第二排148的乘员。虽然出于说明性目的,第一座椅总成332被描绘为处于面向后取向,但是可以设想,多个座椅总成124中的其他座椅总成可以另外或替代地被置于面向后取向,使得在不脱离本文公开的概念的情况下,这些面向后座椅总成124的乘员可以通过更直接方式与车辆向后座椅总成124的乘员交流。Referring specifically to FIG. 8 , the passenger cabin 140 is depicted in a social arrangement. The social arrangement may be defined as placing one of the seat assemblies 124 in a rearward-facing orientation such that the seat assembly 124 faces the other of the seat assemblies 124 in the row immediately behind the vehicle 100 In this embodiment, one of the seat assemblies 124 behind an adjacent seat assembly is positioned in a forward-facing orientation. For example, first seat assembly 332 may be placed in a rearward-facing orientation such that an occupant of first seat assembly 332 may face an occupant of second seat assembly 336 , wherein second seat assembly 336 is positioned in The second row 148 is in a forward facing orientation. When the occupants of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 now face each other, the legs of each of the occupants will occupy the space between the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 of public space. Therefore, to provide additional footwell for the occupants of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336, it may be beneficial to actuate the first seat assembly 332 toward the forwardmost portion of the rail system 316, The rear portion of the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is positioned adjacent the instrument panel 348 of the vehicle 100 . When the passenger compartment 140 is in the social configuration, the rearward-facing seat assembly 124 (eg, the first seat assembly 332 ) and the vehicle-rearward seat assembly 124 positioned at the rearward-facing seat assembly 124 ( For example, the occupants of the second seat assembly 336 and the third seat assembly 340) may communicate with each other more easily. For example, when the passenger compartment 140 is arranged in the design configuration, the occupants of the second row 148 may have difficulty hearing what the occupants of the first row 144 are saying. This may be due, in part, to sound waves exiting the mouths of the occupants of first row 144 traveling toward the front of the vehicle in first row 144 and ultimately away from the occupants of second row 148 . Although the first seat assembly 332 is depicted in a rearward-facing orientation for illustrative purposes, it is contemplated that other seat assemblies of the plurality of seat assemblies 124 may additionally or alternatively be positioned in a rearward-facing orientation. Oriented such that these occupants of the rearward-facing seat assembly 124 may communicate with the occupants of the vehicle's rearward-facing seat assembly 124 in a more direct manner without departing from the concepts disclosed herein.
具体地参考图9,乘客舱140被描绘为处于儿童看护布置。儿童看护布置的目标可以是允许坐在第一座椅总成332中的父母更容易地向占用第三座椅总成340的儿童提供帮助。在一些示例中,第三座椅总成340可以设置有辅助座椅总成(例如,儿童座椅,参见图18B),所述辅助座椅总成设置在车辆100内或由车辆100的乘员提供。虽然儿童看护布置的所述潜在目标是允许占用第一座椅总成332的父母更容易地帮助占用第三座椅总成340的儿童,但是可以设想,儿童看护布置可以用于替代目的。例如,儿童看护布置可以允许第一座椅总成332的乘员更容易地触及可以存储在地板320上在第三座椅总成340与第四座椅总成344之间的货物或存储在第三座椅总成340上的货物。无论选择儿童看护布置的乘员背后的预期目标、用途或目的如何,儿童看护布置都可以被限定为将第二座椅总成336的座椅204置于向上收起位置并在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332,使得与设计布置相比,第一座椅总成332与第二座椅总成336之间的距离减小。Referring specifically to FIG. 9 , the passenger compartment 140 is depicted in a child care arrangement. The goal of the child care arrangement may be to allow a parent seated in the first seat assembly 332 to more easily provide assistance to a child occupying the third seat assembly 340 . In some examples, the third seat assembly 340 may be provided with a supplementary seat assembly (eg, a child seat, see FIG. 18B ) that is disposed within the vehicle 100 or by an occupant of the vehicle 100 supply. Although the stated underlying goal of the child care arrangement is to allow a parent occupying the first seat assembly 332 to more easily assist a child occupying the third seat assembly 340, it is contemplated that the child care arrangement may be used for alternative purposes. For example, a child care arrangement may allow an occupant of the first seat assembly 332 to more easily access cargo that may be stored on the floor 320 between the third seat assembly 340 and the fourth seat assembly 344 or stored on the floor 320 . Cargo on the 340 with three seats. Regardless of the intended goals, uses or purposes behind an occupant selecting a child care arrangement, the child care arrangement may be defined as placing the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 in the stowed upward position and in the rearward direction of the vehicle. The first seat assembly 332 is actuated against the rail system 316 such that the distance between the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 is reduced compared to the design arrangement.
再次参考图9,在一些示例中,第一座椅总成332的转动总成260可以由第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180围绕竖直轴线268致动,使得第一座椅总成332在逆时针方向上朝向第三座椅总成340旋转。第一座椅总成332的转动总成260的此类致动还可以使得第一座椅总成332的乘员能够触及第三座椅总成340的乘员和/或被定位在第四座椅总成344后方的货物。与本文描绘的其他示例性布置一样,对儿童看护布置的当前描绘意图在本质上是示例性的而非限制性的。因此,在不脱离本文公开的概念的情况下,可以利用座椅总成124中的其他座椅总成来实现儿童看护布置。因此,儿童看护布置可以被限定为座椅总成124中的一个车辆向前座椅总成在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动,使得座椅总成124中的一个车辆向前座椅总成靠近座椅总成124中的一个车辆向后座椅总成定位,其中座椅总成124中的一个车辆向后座椅总成的座椅204任选地被定位处于向上收起位置。儿童看护布置还可以被限定为将座椅总成124中的纵向相邻的座椅总成共同定位在乘客舱140的区域(例如,中心区域304或后部区域308)中的单个区域内。例如,在图9中描绘的布置中,第一座椅总成332从乘客舱140的前部区域300向后致动,使得第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336都定位在中心区域304中。在各种示例中,将乘客舱140置于儿童看护布置中可以在乘客舱140处于儿童看护布置中的持续时间内将乘客舱140的总座椅容量降低值1(例如,第二座椅总成336可能变得对乘员不可用)。可以通过第一座椅总成332的乘员与用户界面120的交互来实现到儿童看护布置的转变。在一些示例中,可以通过乘客舱140的乘员说出触发词、短语或手势来发起到儿童看护布置的转变。触发词、短语或手势可以被预编程到控制器104中或由用户定制。例如,触发词、短语或手势可以包括但不限于“求助”、“妈妈”、“爸爸”、“我摔倒了”、“哦不”、“儿童看护布置”、“滑回”等等。通常,触发词、短语或手势可以是可以口头或视觉传送的识别的、编程的或保存的信号。Referring again to FIG. 9 , in some examples, the rotational assembly 260 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated about the vertical axis 268 by the rotational actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332 such that the first seat The assembly 332 rotates in a counterclockwise direction toward the third seat assembly 340 . Such actuation of the rotation assembly 260 of the first seat assembly 332 may also enable an occupant of the first seat assembly 332 to reach an occupant of the third seat assembly 340 and/or be positioned on the fourth seat. Assembly 344 rear cargo. As with the other exemplary arrangements depicted herein, the present depictions of child care arrangements are intended to be illustrative in nature and not restrictive. Therefore, other seat assemblies within the seat assembly 124 may be utilized to implement a child care arrangement without departing from the concepts disclosed herein. Accordingly, the child care arrangement may be defined as one of the vehicle forward seat assemblies 124 actuating along the rail system 316 in a vehicle rearward direction such that one of the seat assemblies 124 is vehicle forward seated. The chair assembly is positioned adjacent a vehicle rearward seat assembly of one of the seat assemblies 124 , wherein the seat 204 of the vehicle rearward seat assembly of the one of the seat assemblies 124 is optionally positioned in an upwardly stowed position. Location. The child care arrangement may also be defined as co-locating longitudinally adjacent ones of the seat assemblies 124 within a single region of the passenger compartment 140 (eg, center region 304 or rear region 308 ). For example, in the arrangement depicted in FIG. 9 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated rearwardly from the forward area 300 of the passenger compartment 140 such that both the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 are positioned in center area 304. In various examples, placing the passenger compartment 140 in a child care arrangement may reduce the total seating capacity of the passenger compartment 140 by a value of 1 (e.g., the second total seat capacity) for the duration that the passenger compartment 140 is in the child care arrangement. 336 may become unavailable to the crew). Transition to a child care arrangement may be accomplished by an occupant of the first seat assembly 332 interacting with the user interface 120 . In some examples, transition to a child care arrangement may be initiated by an occupant of passenger cabin 140 uttering a trigger word, phrase, or gesture. Trigger words, phrases, or gestures may be preprogrammed into the controller 104 or customized by the user. For example, trigger words, phrases or gestures may include, but are not limited to, "help," "mom," "dad," "I fell," "oh no," "childcare arrangement," "slide back," and the like. Typically, a trigger word, phrase, or gesture may be a recognized, programmed, or saved signal that may be transmitted verbally or visually.
具体地参考图10,乘客舱140被描绘为处于儿童座椅布置。儿童座椅布置可以被限定为通过转动致动器180致动转动总成260使第二座椅总成336围绕竖直轴线268旋转,使得由第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200和座椅204限定的座椅表面350被呈现给通道门312中的一个紧邻通道门。座椅表面350可以被限定为当乘员坐在给定的座椅总成124上时与乘员直接接合的座椅靠背200和座椅204的表面。当父母和孩子意图占用车辆100时,可以利用儿童座椅布置。通过使第二座椅总成336围绕竖直轴线268旋转以将第二座椅总成336的座椅表面350呈现给通道门312中的一个紧邻通道门,可以降低将儿童放入第二座椅总成336中的难度。在各种示例中,在其中父母希望孩子如此坐在乘客舱140中的示例中,父母可以将儿童座椅联接到第二座椅总成336。未被指定供儿童或身材较小的乘员利用的座椅总成124中的其余座椅总成可以处于各种位置或布置,同时仍然至少部分地构成儿童座椅布置。虽然所描绘的示例将第二座椅总成336示出为围绕其竖直轴线268朝向通道门312中的一个紧邻通道门旋转,但是本公开不限于此。更确切地,可以设想,第三座椅总成340可以如此布置,或者定位在第三排152中的座椅总成124中的一者可以被布置成接受儿童乘员或身材较小的乘员。在其中定位在第三排152中的座椅总成124中的一者被置于儿童座椅布置中的示例中,要如此定位的第三排152中的座椅总成124可以围绕其竖直轴线268旋转,使得第三排152中的座椅总成124的座椅表面350朝向车辆100的后部举升式车门取向,所述举升式车门构成定位在车辆100的后侧的通道门312中的一者。Referring specifically to FIG. 10 , the passenger compartment 140 is depicted in a child seat arrangement. The child seat arrangement may be defined by actuating the rotary assembly 260 by the rotary actuator 180 to rotate the second seat assembly 336 about the vertical axis 268 such that the seat back 200 and The seating surface 350 defined by the seat 204 is presented to one of the access doors 312 immediately adjacent to the access door. Seat surface 350 may be defined as the surface of seat back 200 and seat 204 that directly engages an occupant when seated on a given seat assembly 124 . When parents and children intend to occupy the vehicle 100, a child seat arrangement may be utilized. By rotating the second seat assembly 336 about the vertical axis 268 to present the seating surface 350 of the second seat assembly 336 to one of the access doors 312 immediately adjacent to the access door 312 , placing a child into the second seat can be reduced. Difficulty in chair assembly 336. In various examples, in which the parent desires the child to be so seated in the passenger compartment 140 , the parent may couple the child seat to the second seat assembly 336 . Remaining seat assemblies 124 that are not designated for use by children or smaller occupants may be in various positions or arrangements while still at least partially constituting a child seat arrangement. Although the depicted example shows the second seat assembly 336 rotating about its vertical axis 268 toward one of the access doors 312 proximate the access door, the disclosure is not so limited. Rather, it is contemplated that the third seat assembly 340 may be so arranged, or that one of the seat assemblies 124 positioned in the third row 152 may be arranged to accept a child or smaller occupant. In examples where one of the seat assemblies 124 positioned in the third row 152 is placed in a child seat arrangement, the seat assemblies 124 in the third row 152 to be so positioned may be upright about which The direct axis 268 is rotated so that the seating surface 350 of the seat assembly 124 in the third row 152 is oriented toward the rear liftgate of the vehicle 100 that forms a tunnel positioned on the rear side of the vehicle 100 One of the gates 312.
具体地参考图11,乘客舱140被示出为处于入口/出口布置。入口/出口布置可以被限定为与设计布置相比,第二座椅总成336的座椅204被置于向上收起位置,并且第二座椅总成336在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动。通常,入口/出口布置可以被限定为定位在第二排148中的座椅总成124中的一者或多者的相关联座椅204被置于向上收起位置,并且对应的座椅总成124沿着导轨系统316致动使得座椅总成124靠近前部区域300与中心区域304之间的边界定位。在以入口/出口布置如此布置乘客舱140时,乘客可以更容易地触及第三排152以占用定位在其中的座椅总成124。虽然入口/出口布置被描绘为致动定位在第二排148中的座椅总成124中的一者或多者,但是本公开不限于此。更确切地,可以设想,替代的车辆布局可以呈现在除第二排148之外的排中使用入口/出口布置的机会。通常,当其中一排的座椅总成124未设置有通道门312中的一个横向紧邻通道门时,提供入口/出口布置可能是有益的。在这种布局中,车辆向前并且横向紧邻通道门312中的一者的相邻排可以通过本文讨论的方式致动以提供入口/出口布置。Referring specifically to FIG. 11 , the passenger compartment 140 is shown in an entrance/exit arrangement. The entrance/exit arrangement may be defined as compared to the design arrangement with the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 being placed in an upward stowed position and the second seat assembly 336 along the rail system in the vehicle forward direction. 316 actuation. Generally, the entry/exit arrangement may be defined such that the associated seat 204 of one or more of the seat assemblies 124 positioned in the second row 148 is placed in the stowed-up position and the corresponding seat assembly Actuation of the component 124 along the rail system 316 positions the seat assembly 124 proximate the boundary between the front region 300 and the center region 304 . When the passenger compartment 140 is arranged in an entrance/exit arrangement, passengers can more easily access the third row 152 to occupy the seat assembly 124 positioned therein. Although the inlet/outlet arrangement is depicted as actuating one or more of the seat assemblies 124 positioned in the second row 148 , the present disclosure is not so limited. Rather, it is contemplated that alternative vehicle layouts may present opportunities for use of entrance/exit arrangements in rows other than second row 148 . Generally, it may be beneficial to provide an inlet/egress arrangement when one of the rows of seat assemblies 124 is not provided with one of the access doors 312 laterally proximate the access door. In this arrangement, adjacent rows of vehicles forward and laterally adjacent one of the access doors 312 may be actuated in the manner discussed herein to provide an inlet/outlet arrangement.
具体地参考图12,乘客舱140被描绘为处于货物布置。货物布置可以被限定为第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的座椅204被置于向上收起位置,并且第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336沿着导轨系统致动,使得第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336两者都定位在乘客舱140的前部区域300内。通过如此布置第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336,地板320的靠近中心区域304的一部分可以被设置成连续表面区域增加,使得可以在其上存储大物品。虽然作为货物布置进行了讨论,但是可以设想,货物布置可以在替代或附加的情况下利用。例如,当车辆100到达多个乘员的接载目的地时,可以采用乘客舱140的货物布置。通常在这种情况下,乘客舱140的预期乘员可以定位在车辆100的单侧上,其中车辆100的相对侧被取向成朝向车辆100在其上行驶的道路的有效行车道。在此类情况下,乘员从车辆100的远离车辆100在其上行驶的道路的有效车道定位的一侧进入乘客舱140可能是有益的。因此,可以假设货物布置允许初始乘员更容易地触及第三排152中的座椅总成124,以及以较少的障碍触及第三座椅总成340,所述障碍可能由在乘员的这种进入期间定位在第二排148中的第二座椅总成336引起。当第三排152的座椅总成124和第三座椅总成340的乘员坐在其相应的座椅总成124内时,第二座椅总成336可以被致动到第二排148并且其座椅204被致动到向下展开位置以接收预期乘员中的另一者。此时,第四座椅总成344的预期乘员可以通过在第一座椅总成332后方进入乘客舱140来触及第四座椅总成344,以避免爬过第一座椅总成332来触及第四座椅总成344。最后,第一座椅总成332可以沿着导轨系统316向车辆后方致动并将其座椅204旋转到向下展开位置以呈现设计布置,由此向第一座椅总成332的预期乘员呈现第一座椅总成332的可用座椅表面。可以设想,在各种示例中,定位在第三排152中的座椅总成124可以使其座椅204被致动到向上收起位置,以进一步在货物布置中提供附加的存放区域。Referring specifically to FIG. 12 , the passenger compartment 140 is depicted in a cargo arrangement. The cargo arrangement may be defined as the seats 204 of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 being placed in the stowed upward position and the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 along the The track rail system is actuated such that both the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 are positioned within the forward region 300 of the passenger compartment 140 . By arranging the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 in this manner, a portion of the floor 320 proximate the central region 304 may be provided with increased continuous surface area such that large items may be stored thereon. Although discussed as a cargo arrangement, it is contemplated that the cargo arrangement may be utilized in the alternative or in addition. For example, the cargo arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 may be employed when the vehicle 100 arrives at a pickup destination for multiple occupants. Typically in this case, the intended occupant of the passenger compartment 140 may be positioned on a single side of the vehicle 100 , with the opposite side of the vehicle 100 being oriented toward the active lane of the road on which the vehicle 100 is traveling. In such cases, it may be beneficial for the occupants to enter the passenger compartment 140 from a side of the vehicle 100 away from the effective lane location of the road on which the vehicle 100 is traveling. Therefore, it can be assumed that the cargo arrangement allows the initial occupant to more easily access the seat assembly 124 in the third row 152 and access the third seat assembly 340 with less obstruction that may be caused by such obstruction by the occupant. Caused by the second seat assembly 336 positioned in the second row 148 during entry. The second seat assembly 336 may be actuated to the second row 148 when the occupants of the third row 152 seat assembly 124 and the third seat assembly 340 are seated within their respective seat assemblies 124 And its seat 204 is actuated into a downwardly deployed position to receive the other one of the intended occupants. At this point, the intended occupant of the fourth seat assembly 344 may access the fourth seat assembly 344 by entering the passenger compartment 140 behind the first seat assembly 332 to avoid climbing over the first seat assembly 332 . Touch the fourth seat assembly 344. Finally, the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated toward the rear of the vehicle along the rail system 316 and rotate its seat 204 to a downwardly deployed position to assume the design arrangement, thereby presenting the first seat assembly 332 to its intended occupants. The available seating surface of the first seat assembly 332 is presented. It is contemplated that, in various examples, a seat assembly 124 positioned in the third row 152 may have its seats 204 actuated into a stowed-up position to further provide additional storage area in a cargo arrangement.
参考图13,以通用形式描绘了过程流程图。通常,用于调整乘客舱140的布置的过程流程以处于当前座椅布置352的乘客舱140开始。当前座椅布置352可以是本文描述的座椅布置中的任一者或用户已经输入的定制布置。当前座椅布置352可以存储在控制器104的存储器112中。在接收到提示356时,控制器104可以向座椅总成124传输指令信号以将当前座椅布置352调整为预设座椅布置或定制座椅布置。在各种示例中,提示356可以采用由用户界面120传输到控制器104的请求信号的形式。如上所述,用户界面120可以是车辆100的车载部件或车辆100外部的部件。无论用户界面120的定位或布置如何,提示356都可以采取由用户界面120传送到控制器104的请求信号的形式。从用户界面120传输到控制器104的请求信号可以由用户主动地选择(例如,主动地选择乘客舱140的给定布置),或者可以由用户被动地选择(例如,基于乘员的数量和/或车辆100的预期目的地来选择)。用户可以从中选择的预设布置可以包括但不限于设计布置360、放松布置364、入口/出口布置368、儿童座椅布置372、社交布置376和/或儿童看护布置380。在从控制器104传输指令信号以将当前座椅布置352调整为预设布置或定制布置中的一者时,可以选择性地采用空闲时间384。在一些示例中,空闲时间384可以表示意图将当前座椅布置352调整为由用户提供的定制布置的预设布置中的一者的时间范围。替代地,空闲时间384可以表示实现乘客舱140的所请求布置的中间步骤。例如,如果选择入口/出口布置368,则空闲时间384可以表示意图允许乘员进入或离开乘客舱140的时间范围。类似地,如果选择了儿童座椅布置372,则空闲时间384可以表示意图供父母乘员将儿童乘员定位在呈现给通道门312中的一者的座椅总成124中的一者内的时间范围。与儿童座椅布置372一样,如果选择了儿童看护布置380,则空闲时间384可以表示意图允许第一座椅总成332的父母或看护乘员帮助占用第三座椅总成340的儿童的时间范围。在假设选定布置或终止空闲时间384之后,将当前座椅布置352调整为替代座椅布置的过程可以到达终点388,此时可以将新的当前座椅布置存储在控制器104的存储器112中以供将来参考。Referring to Figure 13, a process flow diagram is depicted in a general form. Generally, the process flow for adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 begins with the passenger compartment 140 in the current seating arrangement 352 . The current seating arrangement 352 may be any of the seating arrangements described herein or a custom arrangement that has been entered by the user. The current seating arrangement 352 may be stored in the memory 112 of the controller 104 . Upon receiving the prompt 356 , the controller 104 may transmit an instruction signal to the seat assembly 124 to adjust the current seating arrangement 352 to a preset seating arrangement or a customized seating arrangement. In various examples, prompt 356 may take the form of a request signal transmitted by user interface 120 to controller 104 . As mentioned above, user interface 120 may be an onboard component of vehicle 100 or a component external to vehicle 100 . Regardless of the positioning or arrangement of user interface 120 , prompt 356 may take the form of a request signal transmitted by user interface 120 to controller 104 . The request signal transmitted from user interface 120 to controller 104 may be actively selected by the user (eg, actively select a given arrangement of passenger compartment 140 ), or may be passively selected by the user (eg, based on the number of occupants and/or vehicle 100's intended destination). Preset arrangements from which the user may select may include, but are not limited to, design arrangement 360 , relaxation arrangement 364 , entrance/exit arrangement 368 , child seat arrangement 372 , social arrangement 376 , and/or child care arrangement 380 . The idle time 384 may be selectively employed when transmitting instruction signals from the controller 104 to adjust the current seating arrangement 352 to one of a preset arrangement or a customized arrangement. In some examples, idle time 384 may represent a time range during which the current seating arrangement 352 is intended to be adjusted to one of the preset arrangements of custom arrangements provided by the user. Alternatively, idle time 384 may represent an intermediate step in achieving the requested arrangement of passenger cabin 140 . For example, if entrance/exit arrangement 368 is selected, idle time 384 may represent a time range during which an occupant is intended to be allowed to enter or exit passenger cabin 140 . Similarly, if a child seat arrangement 372 is selected, the idle time 384 may represent a time range intended for a parent occupant to position a child occupant within one of the seat assemblies 124 presented to one of the access doors 312 . As with child seat arrangement 372 , if child care arrangement 380 is selected, idle time 384 may represent a time frame intended to allow a parent or caregiver occupant of first seat assembly 332 to assist a child occupying third seat assembly 340 . After assuming a selected configuration or terminating the idle time 384 , the process of adjusting the current seating arrangement 352 to the alternative seating arrangement may reach an end point 388 at which time the new current seating arrangement may be stored in the memory 112 of the controller 104 for future reference.
参考图14A至图15,描绘了根据一个示例的从设计布置(图14A)到放松布置(图14B)的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,诸如设计布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。用于从设计布置转变到放松布置的相关致动器可以包括第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172、第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168、第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172以及第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件致动器176。这些致动器中的每一者可以通信地耦合到对应的位置传感器,所述位置传感器向控制器104通知给定致动器的当前位置。给定致动器与给定位置传感器之间的通信耦合可以采用给定位置传感器与给定致动器集成的形式。例如,第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172可以各自与对应的座椅位置传感器280通信地耦合,第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168可以与座椅靠背位置传感器276通信地耦合,并且小腿支撑件致动器176可以与小腿支撑件位置传感器404通信地耦合。因此,在接收到将乘客舱140的布置从设计布置调整到放松布置的请求信号时,控制器104可能已经存储了第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的每个相关部件的当前位置。Referring to Figures 14A-15, a transition from a design arrangement (Figure 14A) to a relaxed arrangement (Figure 14B) is depicted according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, such as a design arrangement. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 400 transformation. Relevant actuators for transitioning from the design configuration to the relaxed configuration may include the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336, the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332, the first seat Seat actuator 172 of chair assembly 332 and calf support actuator 176 of first seat assembly 332 . Each of these actuators may be communicatively coupled to a corresponding position sensor that informs controller 104 of the given actuator's current position. The communicative coupling between a given actuator and a given position sensor may take the form of an integration of the given position sensor with the given actuator. For example, the seat actuators 172 of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 may each be communicatively coupled with a corresponding seat position sensor 280 , the seat back of the first seat assembly 332 corresponding to the seat position sensor 280 . The actuator 168 may be communicatively coupled with the seat back position sensor 276 and the calf support actuator 176 may be communicatively coupled with the calf support position sensor 404 . Therefore, upon receiving the request signal to adjust the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the design arrangement to the relaxed arrangement, the controller 104 may have stored each relevant component of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 's current location.
再次参考图14A至图15,在将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到放松布置时,执行在向上方向上朝向向上收起位置致动第二座椅总成336的座椅204的步骤408。另外,执行调整第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200相对于第一座椅总成332的座椅底座228的角度取向使得第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200置于倾斜位置的步骤412。此外,执行在向上方向上致动第一座椅总成332的座椅204以相对于座椅底座228将第一座椅总成332的座椅204置于更倾斜取向的步骤416。此外,将布置从设计布置调整到放松布置包括将第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208从缩回位置朝向延伸位置致动的步骤420。在对第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336进行这些调整时,乘客舱140将从第一布置392(设计布置)成功地调整到第二布置400(放松布置)。在到达放松布置时,可以向第一座椅总成332的乘员提供预定空闲时间424。可以由第一座椅总成332的乘员选择预定空闲时间424。例如,第一座椅总成332的乘员可以决定他们希望在他们占用车辆100期间休息给定时间段。因此,在经过了空闲时间424时,可以向第一座椅总成332的乘员提示他们是否想要返回到设计布置,由此提供决策点428。替代地,第一座椅总成332的乘员可以选择他们是否希望乘客舱140的布置在已经经过空闲时间424时返回到给定布置(例如,设计布置)。在这样的示例中,可以通过第一座椅总成332从放松布置到设计布置的缓慢致动而从休息时段轻轻地唤醒乘员。Referring again to FIGS. 14A-15 , when transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the design configuration to the relaxed configuration, step 408 of actuating the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 in an upward direction toward the upward stowed position is performed. Additionally, adjusting the angular orientation of the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 relative to the seat base 228 of the first seat assembly 332 is performed such that the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is placed in a reclined position. Step 412. Additionally, step 416 is performed of actuating the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 in an upward direction to place the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 in a more tilted orientation relative to the seat base 228 . Additionally, adjusting the arrangement from the design arrangement to the relaxed arrangement includes actuating 420 the calf support 208 of the first seat assembly 332 from a retracted position toward an extended position. In making these adjustments to the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336, the passenger compartment 140 will be successfully adjusted from the first arrangement 392 (design arrangement) to the second arrangement 400 (relaxed arrangement). Upon reaching the relaxed configuration, the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 may be provided with a predetermined idle time 424 . The predetermined idle time 424 may be selected by the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 . For example, the occupants of the first seat assembly 332 may decide that they wish to rest for a given period of time while they occupy the vehicle 100 . Accordingly, when the idle time 424 has elapsed, the occupants of the first seat assembly 332 may be prompted as to whether they wish to return to the design arrangement, thereby providing a decision point 428 . Alternatively, the occupants of the first seat assembly 332 may select whether they want the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 to return to a given arrangement (eg, a design arrangement) when the idle time 424 has elapsed. In such an example, the occupant may be gently awakened from the rest period by slow actuation of the first seat assembly 332 from the relaxed configuration to the designed configuration.
进一步参考图14A至图15,关于第一座椅总成332的乘员是否想要返回到设计布置的决策点428,在第一座椅总成332的乘员选择不返回到设计布置的情况下,所述过程可以在步骤432处退出,使得将不会再次提示乘员退出放松布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,第一座椅总成332的乘员可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果第一座椅总成332的乘员选择退出放松布置并在决策点428处返回到设计布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从放松布置返回到设计布置。在这样的示例中,第一座椅总成332的乘员在决策点428处选择返回到设计布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示436或请求信号。在从放松布置返回到设计布置时,可以在步骤440处将第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208致动到缩回位置。另外,在步骤444处,第一座椅总成332的座椅204可以减小座椅204相对于第一座椅总成332的座椅底座228的倾斜角度。此外,在步骤448处,将第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200从倾斜位置朝向直立位置致动。最后,在步骤452处,可以将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置,由此完成从第二布置400(放松布置)到第一布置392(设计布置)的转变。With further reference to FIGS. 14A-15 , a decision point 428 regarding whether the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 wishes to return to the design arrangement, in the event that the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 elects not to return to the design arrangement, The process may exit at step 432 so that the occupant will not be prompted again to exit the relaxation arrangement. In such an example, the occupant of first seat assembly 332 may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 elects to exit the relaxed configuration and return to the design configuration at decision point 428, the process of adjusting the layout of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return from the relaxed configuration to the design configuration. In such an example, the occupant of first seat assembly 332 selecting to return to the design arrangement at decision point 428 may be considered a prompt 436 or request signal transmitted to controller 104 . Upon returning from the relaxed configuration to the design configuration, the calf support 208 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated to the retracted position at step 440 . Additionally, at step 444 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may reduce the tilt angle of the seat 204 relative to the seat base 228 of the first seat assembly 332 . Additionally, at step 448, the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated from the reclined position toward the upright position. Finally, at step 452 , the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 may be actuated to the deployed downward position, thereby completing the transition from the second arrangement 400 (relaxed arrangement) to the first arrangement 392 (design arrangement). change.
参考图16A至图17,描绘了根据一个示例的从设计布置(图16A)到社交布置(图16B)的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,诸如设计布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是社交布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。用于从设计布置到社交布置的转变的相关致动器至少是第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180。第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180通信地耦合到第一座椅总成332的转动位置传感器284。第一座椅总成332的转动位置传感器284向控制器104通知第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180的当前位置。转动致动器180与转动位置传感器284之间的通信耦合可以采用转动位置传感器284与转动致动器180集成的形式。因此,在接收到将乘客舱140的布置从设计布置调整到社交布置的请求信号时,控制器104可能已经存储了转动致动器284的当前位置。Referring to Figures 16A-17, a transition from a design arrangement (Figure 16A) to a social arrangement (Figure 16B) is depicted according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, such as a design arrangement. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a social arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate the transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 . The relevant actuator for the transition from the design arrangement to the social arrangement is at least the rotational actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332 . The rotational actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332 is communicatively coupled to the rotational position sensor 284 of the first seat assembly 332 . The rotational position sensor 284 of the first seat assembly 332 notifies the controller 104 of the current position of the rotational actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332 . The communication coupling between the rotational actuator 180 and the rotational position sensor 284 may take the form of the rotational position sensor 284 being integrated with the rotational actuator 180 . Therefore, upon receipt of a request signal to adjust the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the design arrangement to the social arrangement, the controller 104 may have stored the current position of the rotation actuator 284 .
再次参考图16A至图17,在将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到社交布置时,可以采用在向上方向上朝向向上收起位置致动第一座椅总成332的座椅204的步骤456。取决于第一座椅总成332与紧邻环境之间的可用间隙,在步骤456处可以省略朝向向上收起位置致动第一座椅总成332的座椅204。另外,在将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到社交布置时,可以在步骤460处完成使第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转。例如,第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268的旋转可以通过致动第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180来实现,使得第一座椅总成332沿着相关联的转动总成260的行进路径旋转。第一座椅总成332围绕竖直轴线旋转可以将第一座椅总成332置于面向后取向。以同时或顺序的方式,将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到社交布置可以包括将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置的步骤464A和在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332的步骤464B。通过在车辆向前方向上致动第一座椅总成332,可以增加第一座椅总成332与第二座椅总成336之间的距离,由此为第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的乘员的腿提供附加空间。在同时或顺序地完成步骤464A和464B时,乘客舱140已经成功地置于社交布置的第二布置400。控制器104可以提供预定空闲时间468以将乘客舱140的布置维持处于社交布置。例如,预定空闲时间468可以是当乘客舱140的乘员从他们的接载位置运输到他们的期望目的地时车辆100的行驶时间的持续时间。在预定空闲时间468完成之后,控制器104可以在决策点472处提示用户是否将乘客舱140返回到设计布置。如果乘员选择不将乘客舱140的布置返回到设计布置,则可以在步骤476处退出所述过程,使得将不会再次提示乘员退出社交布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,乘客舱140的一个或多个乘员可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。Referring again to FIGS. 16A-17 , when transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the design configuration to the social configuration, step 456 of actuating the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 in an upward direction toward the upward stowed position may be employed. Depending on the available clearance between the first seat assembly 332 and the immediate environment, actuating the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 toward the stowed upward position at step 456 may be omitted. Additionally, when transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the design configuration to the social configuration, rotation of the first seat assembly 332 about its vertical axis 268 may be accomplished at step 460 . For example, rotation of the first seat assembly 332 about its vertical axis 268 may be accomplished by actuating the rotational actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332 such that the first seat assembly 332 moves along the associated The path of travel of the rotating assembly 260 rotates. Rotation of the first seat assembly 332 about a vertical axis may place the first seat assembly 332 in a rearward-facing orientation. In a simultaneous or sequential manner, transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the design configuration to the social configuration may include step 464A of actuating the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 to a downwardly deployed position and moving the seat 204 in a forward direction of the vehicle. The rail system 316 actuates step 464B of the first seat assembly 332 . By actuating the first seat assembly 332 in the vehicle forward direction, the distance between the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 may be increased, thereby creating a gap between the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 332 . The two-seat assembly 336 provides additional leg space for the occupants. Upon completion of steps 464A and 464B simultaneously or sequentially, the passenger cabin 140 has been successfully placed in the second arrangement 400 of the social arrangement. The controller 104 may provide a predetermined idle time 468 to maintain the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 in a social arrangement. For example, predetermined idle time 468 may be the duration of vehicle 100 travel time while the occupants of passenger compartment 140 are being transported from their pickup location to their desired destination. After completion of the scheduled idle time 468, the controller 104 may prompt the user at decision point 472 whether to return the passenger compartment 140 to the design arrangement. If the occupant chooses not to return the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 to the design arrangement, the process may be exited at step 476 so that the occupant will not be prompted again to exit the social arrangement. In such examples, one or more occupants of passenger compartment 140 may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired.
再次参考图16A至图17,如果乘客舱140的一个或多个乘员选择退出放松布置并在决策点472处返回到设计布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从社交布置返回到设计布置。在这样的示例中,乘客舱140的一个或多个乘员在决策点472处选择返回到设计布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示480或请求信号。在从社交布置返回到设计布置时,第一座椅总成332的座椅204可以任选地在步骤484A处朝向向上收起位置致动,并且第一座椅总成332可以在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316以同时或顺序的方式致动。在确定是否采用朝向向上收起位置调整第一座椅总成332的座椅204的任选步骤484A时,控制器104可以参考第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156以确定第一座椅总成332当前是否被占用。当然,在控制器104确定第一座椅总成332被占用时,则可以省略朝向向上收起位置致动第一座椅总成332的座椅204的任选步骤484A,因为这种调整在第一座椅总成332被占用时可能是有挑战性的。在步骤484B中,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184以在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在将乘客舱140从社交布置转变到设计布置时,可以执行使第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转的步骤488,使得第一座椅总成332返回到面向前取向,如图16A中所描绘。如果控制器104通过参考第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156确定第一座椅总成332未被占用,则从社交布置到设计布置的转变可以包括朝向向下展开位置致动第一座椅总成332的座椅204的步骤492。在完成步骤488和/或步骤492后,所述过程将已经成功地将乘客舱140的布置从社交布置调整到设计布置。Referring again to FIGS. 16A-17 , if one or more occupants of passenger cabin 140 elect to exit the relaxed configuration and return to the design configuration at decision point 472 , the process of adjusting the layout of passenger cabin 140 will generally be reversed to move from a social configuration Return to design layout. In such an example, the selection by one or more occupants of passenger compartment 140 to return to the design arrangement at decision point 472 may be considered a prompt 480 or request signal transmitted to controller 104 . Upon returning from the social configuration to the design configuration, the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may optionally be actuated toward the stowed upward position at step 484A, and the first seat assembly 332 may be rearwardly positioned in the vehicle. Actuation is performed upwardly along the rail system 316 in a simultaneous or sequential manner. In determining whether to employ the optional step 484A of adjusting the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 toward the stowed upward position, the controller 104 may refer to the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 to determine whether the first seat Whether assembly 332 is currently occupied. Of course, when the controller 104 determines that the first seat assembly 332 is occupied, then the optional step 484A of actuating the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 toward the stowed upward position may be omitted because such adjustment is The first seat assembly 332 may be challenging to occupy. In step 484B, the controller 104 activates the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 to actuate the first seat assembly 332 along the rail system 316 in the vehicle rearward direction. When transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the social configuration to the design configuration, step 488 of rotating the first seat assembly 332 about its vertical axis 268 may be performed such that the first seat assembly 332 returns to a forward-facing orientation, such as Depicted in Figure 16A. If the controller 104 determines that the first seat assembly 332 is unoccupied by reference to the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 , transitioning from the social configuration to the design configuration may include actuating the first seat toward the downwardly deployed position. Step 492 of the seat 204 of the chair assembly 332 . Upon completion of step 488 and/or step 492, the process will have successfully adjusted the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the social arrangement to the design arrangement.
参考图18A至图19,描绘了根据一个示例的从设计布置(图18A)到儿童看护布置(图18B)的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,诸如设计布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是儿童看护布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。用于从设计布置到儿童看护布置的转变的致动器中的每一者可以通信地耦合到对应的位置传感器,所述位置传感器向控制器104通知给定致动器的当前位置。给定致动器与给定位置传感器之间的通信耦合可以采用给定位置传感器与给定致动器集成的形式。例如,第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172可以与座椅位置传感器280通信地耦合,第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180可以与转动位置传感器284通信地耦合,并且平移致动器184可以通信地耦合到导轨位置传感器或导轨传感器136(例如,通过控制器104)。因此,在接收到将乘客舱140的布置从设计布置调整到儿童看护布置的请求信号时,控制器104可能已经存储了第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的每个相关部件的当前位置,包括至少第一座椅总成332的当前导轨位置。Referring to Figures 18A-19, a transition from a design arrangement (Figure 18A) to a child care arrangement (Figure 18B) is depicted according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, such as a design arrangement. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a child care arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 400 transformation. Each of the actuators used for transitioning from the design arrangement to the child care arrangement may be communicatively coupled to a corresponding position sensor that informs the controller 104 of the current position of the given actuator. The communicative coupling between a given actuator and a given position sensor may take the form of an integration of the given position sensor with the given actuator. For example, the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 may be communicatively coupled with the seat position sensor 280 and the rotational actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332 may be communicatively coupled with the rotational position sensor 284, And translation actuator 184 may be communicatively coupled to a rail position sensor or rail sensor 136 (eg, via controller 104). Accordingly, upon receiving a request signal to adjust the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the design arrangement to the child care arrangement, the controller 104 may have stored each of the associated first seat assembly 332 and second seat assembly 336 Current positions of components, including at least the current rail position of the first seat assembly 332 .
再次参考图18A至图19,在将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到儿童看护布置时,可以执行在向上方向上朝向向上收起位置致动第二座椅总成336的座椅204的步骤492。在执行第二座椅总成336的座椅204朝向向上收起位置的致动之前,可以参考第二座椅总成336的占用传感器156以检测乘员当前是否坐在第二座椅总成336中。在已经请求转变到儿童看护布置时在第二座椅总成336中检测到乘员的情况下,可以关于由于第二座椅总成336的占用状态而导致儿童看护布置不可用向请求调整到儿童看护布置的用户提供提示、错误消息或其他类型的通知。Referring again to FIGS. 18A-19 , when transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the design configuration to the child care configuration, step 492 of actuating the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 in an upward direction toward the upward stowed position may be performed. . Before performing actuation of the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 toward the stowed upward position, the occupancy sensor 156 of the second seat assembly 336 may be referenced to detect whether an occupant is currently seated in the second seat assembly 336 middle. In the event that an occupant is detected in the second seat assembly 336 while a transition to a child care arrangement has been requested, a request may be made regarding the unavailability of the child care arrangement due to the occupied state of the second seat assembly 336 to adjust to the child. Users of the care placement are provided with prompts, error messages, or other types of notifications.
再次参考图18A至图19,相对于第二座椅总成336的座椅204朝向向上收起位置的致动,可以以同时或顺序的方式激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184以在步骤496处在向后方向上朝向第二座椅总成336致动第一座椅总成332。在将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向上收起位置并在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332时,乘客舱140的布置将到达第二布置400,所述第二布置在本示例中是儿童看护布置。在一些示例中,儿童看护布置还可以包括激活转动致动器180,使得转动总成260围绕竖直轴线268致动并且第一座椅总成332朝向第二座椅或第三座椅总成340旋转。在各种示例中,第三座椅总成可以设置有辅助座椅总成500,其中辅助座椅总成500被配置为接收较小身材的乘员。在完成从设计布置到儿童看护布置的转变时,所述过程可以提供预定空闲时间504。预定空闲时间504可以由用户发送或编程到控制器104中。例如,可以基于第一座椅总成332的乘员(例如,父母或看护者)与第三座椅总成340的乘员(例如,儿童)一起在车辆100内运输或通勤时在帮助儿童完成各种常见事件(例如,辅助吃食物、辅助喝饮料、提供娱乐、安慰等等)花费的预期平均时间段来选择预定空闲时间504。在经过了空闲时间504时,可以向第一座椅总成332的乘员提示他们是否想要返回到设计布置,由此提供决策点508。在第一座椅总成332的乘员选择不返回到设计布置的情况下,可以在步骤512处退出所述过程,使得将不会再提示乘员退出儿童看护布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,第一座椅总成332的乘员可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果第一座椅总成332的乘员选择退出儿童看护布置并在决策点508处返回到设计布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以使布置从儿童看护布置返回到设计布置。在这样的示例中,第一座椅总成332的乘员在决策点508处选择返回到设计布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示516或请求信号。Referring again to FIGS. 18A-19 , the translational actuators of the first seat assembly 332 may be activated in a simultaneous or sequential manner relative to actuation of the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 toward the stowed upward position. 184 to actuate the first seat assembly 332 in a rearward direction toward the second seat assembly 336 at step 496 . Upon actuating the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 to the stowed upward position and actuating the first seat assembly 332 along the rail system 316 in the rearward direction of the vehicle, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will reach the third A second arrangement 400, which in this example is a child care arrangement. In some examples, the child care arrangement may further include activating the rotational actuator 180 such that the rotational assembly 260 is actuated about the vertical axis 268 and the first seat assembly 332 is oriented toward the second seat or the third seat assembly. 340 spins. In various examples, the third seat assembly may be provided with a booster seat assembly 500 , wherein the booster seat assembly 500 is configured to receive a smaller stature occupant. The process may provide a predetermined idle time 504 upon completion of the transition from the design arrangement to the childcare arrangement. The predetermined idle time 504 may be sent by the user or programmed into the controller 104 . For example, an occupant of the first seat assembly 332 (eg, a parent or caregiver) may be used to assist the child in completing various tasks while transporting or commuting within the vehicle 100 with an occupant (eg, a child) of the third seat assembly 340 . Predetermined idle time 504 is selected based on an expected average time period spent on common events (eg, assisting with eating food, assisting with drinking, providing entertainment, comfort, etc.). When the idle time 504 has elapsed, the occupants of the first seat assembly 332 may be prompted as to whether they wish to return to the design arrangement, thereby providing a decision point 508 . In the event that the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 elects not to return to the design arrangement, the process may be exited at step 512 so that the occupant will no longer be prompted to exit the child care arrangement. In such an example, the occupant of first seat assembly 332 may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 elects to exit the child care arrangement and returns to the design arrangement at decision point 508 , the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return the arrangement from the child care arrangement to the design arrangement. Design layout. In such an example, the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 selecting to return to the design arrangement at decision point 508 may be considered a prompt 516 or request signal transmitted to the controller 104 .
再次参考图18A至图19,在从儿童看护布置返回到设计布置时,在步骤520处,通过第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤524处,通过第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172同时或顺序地将第二座椅总成336的座椅204在向下方向上致动到向下展开位置。在完成步骤524时,乘客舱140的布置已将从第二布置400转变回到第一布置392,这将乘客舱140的布置从儿童看护布置转变回到所描绘的示例中的设计布置。在其中儿童看护布置还包括使第一座椅总成332围绕竖直轴线268旋转的示例中,乘客舱140的布置的返回还包括激活转动致动器180,使得第一座椅总成332围绕第一座椅总成332的竖直轴线268旋转。Referring again to FIGS. 18A-19 , upon returning from the childcare arrangement to the design arrangement, at step 520 , the translational actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated in the vehicle forward direction along the rail system 316 First seat assembly 332. At step 524 , the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is simultaneously or sequentially actuated in the downward direction to the downwardly deployed position by the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 . Upon completion of step 524 , the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 has transitioned from the second arrangement 400 back to the first arrangement 392 , which transitions the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from a child care arrangement back to the design arrangement in the depicted example. In the example where the child care arrangement further includes rotating the first seat assembly 332 about the vertical axis 268 , return of the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 further includes activating the rotation actuator 180 such that the first seat assembly 332 rotates about the vertical axis 268 . The vertical axis 268 of the first seat assembly 332 rotates.
参考图20A至图21,描绘了根据一个示例的从设计布置(图20A)到儿童座椅布置(图20B)的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,诸如设计布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是儿童座椅布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。与先前示例一样,转动致动器180可以与转动位置传感器284通信地耦合。另外,转动位置传感器284通信地耦合到控制器104,使得控制器104被通知转动致动器180的当前位置。因此,在接收到将乘客舱140的布置从设计布置调整到儿童座椅布置的请求信号时,控制器104可能已经存储了转动总成260和/或转动致动器180的当前位置。Referring to FIGS. 20A-21 , a transition from a design arrangement (FIG. 20A) to a child seat arrangement (FIG. 20B) is depicted according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, such as a design arrangement. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a child seat arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate the transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 by transmitting a command signal to the rotational actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 . As with the previous example, rotational actuator 180 may be communicatively coupled with rotational position sensor 284 . Additionally, rotational position sensor 284 is communicatively coupled to controller 104 such that controller 104 is informed of the current position of rotational actuator 180 . Therefore, upon receipt of a request signal to adjust the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the design arrangement to the child seat arrangement, the controller 104 may have stored the current position of the rotational assembly 260 and/or the rotational actuator 180 .
再次参考图20A至图21,在将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到儿童座椅布置时,控制器104可以参考由转动位置传感器284提供的第二座椅总成336的当前位置以及存储在控制器104的存储器112内的程序116以确定执行第二座椅总成336到儿童座椅布置的所请求调整所需的致动程度。在通过转动致动器180执行第二座椅总成336的致动之前,控制器104可以参考第二座椅总成336的占用传感器156以确定第二座椅总成336能够接收乘员(例如,确定第二座椅总成336未被占用)。在已经请求转变到儿童座椅布置时在第二座椅总成336中检测到乘员的情况下,可以关于由于第二座椅总成336的占用状态而导致用于儿童座椅布置的第二座椅总成336不可用向请求调整到儿童座椅布置的用户提供提示、错误消息或其他类型的通知。在这种情况下,可以向用户呈现乘客舱140内的替代座椅位置,所述替代座椅位置已经被识别为当前未被占用的座椅总成124。在确定第二座椅总成336或座椅总成124中的另一者可用于接收乘员并且因此可以置于儿童座椅布置时,控制器104传输指令信号以激活第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180使得在步骤528处第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268旋转。在所描绘的示例中,用于实现从设计布置到儿童座椅布置的转变的围绕第二座椅总成336的竖直轴线268的旋转程度为在顺时针方向上约九十度(90°)。然而,本公开不限于此。更确切地,实现并非第一座椅总成332或第二座椅总成336的座椅总成124中的一者的儿童座椅布置可能需要不同的旋转程度和/或不同的旋转方向。例如,在第三座椅总成340或第四座椅总成344用于完成儿童座椅布置的情况下,第三座椅总成340或第四座椅总成344将需要围绕它们对应的竖直轴线268在逆时针方向上旋转约九十度(90°)。在第三排152中的座椅总成124中的一者在儿童座椅布置期间将用作座椅总成124的情况下,所选择的座椅总成124可以在顺时针或逆时针方向上旋转约一百八十度(180°),使得座椅总成124从面向前取向转变到面向后取向。无论旋转方向、旋转程度以及用于执行从设计布置到儿童座椅布置的转变的特定座椅总成124如何,如上文所讨论的,儿童座椅布置的总体目标是呈现座椅总成124中的一者的座椅表面,所述座椅表面紧邻通道门中的一者(例如,侧通道门或后部举升式车门)。在所描绘的示例中,在第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268在顺时针方向上旋转约九十度(90°)时,如步骤528处所述,乘客舱140将已经成功地置于第二布置400,所述第二布置是儿童座椅布置。Referring again to FIGS. 20A-21 , when transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the design configuration to the child seat configuration, the controller 104 may reference the current position of the second seat assembly 336 provided by the rotational position sensor 284 as well as the current position stored in the control A program 116 within the memory 112 of the controller 104 determines the degree of actuation required to perform the requested adjustment of the second seat assembly 336 to the child seat arrangement. Before performing actuation of the second seat assembly 336 by rotating the actuator 180 , the controller 104 may reference the occupancy sensor 156 of the second seat assembly 336 to determine that the second seat assembly 336 is capable of receiving an occupant (e.g., , confirming that the second seat assembly 336 is not occupied). In the event that an occupant is detected in the second seat assembly 336 when a transition to a child seat arrangement has been requested, a second change for the child seat arrangement due to the occupied state of the second seat assembly 336 may be made. Seat assembly 336 is unavailable to provide prompts, error messages, or other types of notifications to users requesting adjustment to a child seat arrangement. In this case, the user may be presented with an alternative seating position within the passenger compartment 140 that has been identified as the currently unoccupied seat assembly 124 . Upon determining that the other of the second seat assembly 336 or the seat assembly 124 is available to receive an occupant and therefore can be placed in a child seat arrangement, the controller 104 transmits a command signal to activate the second seat assembly 336 The rotation actuator 180 causes the second seat assembly 336 to rotate about its vertical axis 268 at step 528 . In the depicted example, the degree of rotation about the vertical axis 268 of the second seat assembly 336 for effecting a transition from a design arrangement to a child seat arrangement is approximately ninety degrees (90°) in a clockwise direction. ). However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto. Rather, implementing a child seat arrangement in one of the seat assemblies 124 that is not the first seat assembly 332 or the second seat assembly 336 may require a different degree of rotation and/or a different direction of rotation. For example, in the case where the third seat assembly 340 or the fourth seat assembly 344 is used to complete the child seat arrangement, the third seat assembly 340 or the fourth seat assembly 344 will need to surround their corresponding Vertical axis 268 is rotated approximately ninety degrees (90°) in a counterclockwise direction. In the event that one of the seat assemblies 124 in the third row 152 will serve as the seat assembly 124 during child seat deployment, the selected seat assembly 124 may be in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. Rotating upward approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) causes the seat assembly 124 to transition from a forward-facing orientation to a rearward-facing orientation. Regardless of the direction of rotation, the degree of rotation, and the particular seat assembly 124 used to perform the transition from the designed arrangement to the child seat arrangement, as discussed above, the overall goal of the child seat arrangement is to render the seat assembly 124 A seating surface that is adjacent to one of the access doors (e.g., a side access door or a rear liftgate). In the depicted example, when the second seat assembly 336 is rotated approximately ninety degrees (90°) in a clockwise direction about its vertical axis 268 , as described at step 528 , the passenger compartment 140 will have successfully The ground is placed in a second arrangement 400, which is a child seat arrangement.
进一步参考图20A至图21,在完成到第二布置400的转变时,可以为所述过程提供预定空闲时间532。替代地,控制器104可以维持乘客舱140的儿童座椅布置,直到用户另有指示(例如,经由用户界面120)。在采用预定空闲时间532的示例中,预定空闲时间532可以由用户设置或编程到控制器104中。预定空闲时间532可以对应于用于使儿童或身材较小的乘员坐在第二座椅总成336中的典型时间段。类似地,预定空闲时间532可以对应于成年人乘员坐在第二座椅总成336中的典型时间量。因此,虽然被称为儿童座椅布置,但是可以设想,儿童座椅布置在进入或离开车辆100期间可能类似地有益于成年人乘员。无论所呈现的座椅总成124(例如,所描绘的示例中的第二座椅总成336)的乘员是成年人还是儿童,在乘客舱140从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变成功完成和/或经过预定空闲时间532(如采用)之后,都可以向用户呈现关于他们是否想要返回到设计布置的提示,由此提供决策点536。在第二座椅总成336的乘员选择不返回到设计布置的情况下,可以在步骤540处退出所述过程,使得将不会再提示乘员或用户退出儿童座椅布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,第二座椅总成336的乘员或用户可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果第二座椅总成336的乘员或用户选择退出儿童座椅布置并在决策点536处返回到设计布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从儿童座椅布置返回到设计布置。在这样的示例中,第二座椅总成336的乘员或用户在决策点536处选择返回到设计布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示544或请求信号。在从儿童座椅布置返回到设计布置时,第二座椅总成336通过转动致动器180的激活而围绕其竖直轴线268旋转。更具体地,在步骤548处,通过转动致动器180使第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268在顺时针方向上旋转约九十度(90°)。在步骤548处完成在逆时针方向上的旋转时,第二座椅总成336可以返回到面向前取向,并且乘客舱140将已经恢复设计布置。With further reference to FIGS. 20A-21 , upon completion of the transition to the second arrangement 400 , the process may be provided with a predetermined idle time 532 . Alternatively, the controller 104 may maintain the child seat arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 until otherwise directed by the user (eg, via user interface 120 ). In examples where a predetermined idle time 532 is employed, the predetermined idle time 532 may be set by the user or programmed into the controller 104 . The predetermined idle time 532 may correspond to a typical period of time for seating a child or smaller occupant in the second seat assembly 336 . Similarly, predetermined idle time 532 may correspond to a typical amount of time an adult occupant sits in second seat assembly 336 . Thus, although referred to as a child seat arrangement, it is contemplated that a child seat arrangement may similarly benefit adult occupants during entry into or exit from the vehicle 100 . Regardless of whether the occupant of the seat assembly 124 presented (eg, the second seat assembly 336 in the depicted example) is an adult or a child, the transition of the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 Upon successful completion and/or after a predetermined idle time 532 (if adopted), the user may be presented with a prompt as to whether they wish to return to the design layout, thereby providing a decision point 536. In the event that the occupant of the second seat assembly 336 elects not to return to the design arrangement, the process may be exited at step 540 such that the occupant or user will no longer be prompted to exit the child seat arrangement. In such an example, the occupant or user of the second seat assembly 336 may later interact with the user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the occupant or user of the second seat assembly 336 elects to exit the child seat arrangement and returns to the design arrangement at decision point 536 , the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to switch from the child seat arrangement Return to design layout. In such an example, the selection by the occupant or user of the second seat assembly 336 to return to the design arrangement at decision point 536 may be considered a prompt 544 or request signal transmitted to the controller 104 . Upon returning from the child seat arrangement to the design arrangement, the second seat assembly 336 is rotated about its vertical axis 268 by activation of the rotational actuator 180 . More specifically, at step 548 , the second seat assembly 336 is rotated approximately ninety degrees (90°) in a clockwise direction about its vertical axis 268 by rotating the actuator 180 . Upon completion of rotation in the counterclockwise direction at step 548, the second seat assembly 336 may be returned to the forward-facing orientation and the passenger compartment 140 will have returned to the design arrangement.
参考图22A至图23,描绘了根据一个示例的从设计布置(图22A)到入口/出口布置(图22B)的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,诸如设计布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是入口/出口布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第二座椅总成336来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。与先前示例一样,相关致动器可以与控制器104通信地耦合。类似地,相关位置传感器可以通信地耦合到控制器104。在所描绘的示例中,采用第二座椅总成336的至少座椅致动器172和平移致动器184来将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到入口/出口布置。在一些示例中,还可以采用第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背致动器168。在所示示例中,导轨传感器136、座椅靠背位置传感器276、座椅位置传感器280和/或平移位置传感器288与控制器104通信地耦合,使得控制器104被通知相关联的传感器的每个部件的当前位置。因此,在接收到将乘客舱140的布置从设计布置调整为入口/出口布置的请求信号时,控制器104可能已经存储了第二座椅总成336沿着导轨系统316的当前位置、座椅靠背200相对于座椅底座228的位置、座椅204相对于座椅底座228的位置,并且可以(例如,在存储器112的程序116内)具有平移致动器184将乘客舱140的布置从第一布置392转变到第二布置400所必需的旋转次数可供使用,因为第一布置392和第二布置400是预设或预定布置。Referring to Figures 22A-23, a transition from a design arrangement (Figure 22A) to an inlet/outlet arrangement (Figure 22B) is depicted according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, such as a design arrangement. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is an inlet/outlet arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate the transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 by transmitting a command signal to the second seat assembly 336 . As with the previous example, the associated actuator may be communicatively coupled with the controller 104 . Similarly, associated position sensors may be communicatively coupled to controller 104 . In the depicted example, at least the seat actuator 172 and the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 are employed to transition the passenger compartment 140 from a design arrangement to an inlet/exit arrangement. In some examples, the seat back actuator 168 of the second seat assembly 336 may also be employed. In the example shown, rail sensor 136 , seatback position sensor 276 , seat position sensor 280 and/or translation position sensor 288 are communicatively coupled with controller 104 such that controller 104 is notified of each of the associated sensors. The current position of the widget. Therefore, upon receiving a request signal to adjust the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the design arrangement to the entrance/exit arrangement, the controller 104 may have stored the current position of the second seat assembly 336 along the rail system 316, the seat The position of the backrest 200 relative to the seat base 228 , the position of the seat 204 relative to the seat base 228 , and may have a translation actuator 184 (eg, within the program 116 of the memory 112 ) to change the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the The number of rotations necessary to transition one arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 is available because the first arrangement 392 and the second arrangement 400 are preset or predetermined arrangements.
再次参考图22A至图23,在将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到入口/出口布置时,控制器104可以参考由第二座椅总成336的座椅位置传感器280提供的第二座椅总成336的座椅204的当前位置以及存储在控制器104的存储器112内的程序116以确定执行乘客舱140的所请求调整的至少一部分所需要的致动程度。例如,控制器104可以确定第二座椅总成336的座椅204处于向下展开位置,并且需要将座椅204致动到向上收起位置以从设计布置转变到入口/出口布置。在执行从设计布置到入口/出口布置的转变之前,控制器104可以参考第二座椅总成336的占用传感器以确定第二座椅总成336未被占用。在已经请求转变到入口/出口布置时在第二座椅总成336中检测到乘员的情况下,可以关于由于第二座椅总成336的占用状态而导致这种转变不可用向请求调整到入口/出口布置的用户提供提示、错误消息或其他类型的通知。然而,在确定第二座椅总成336未被占用并且可用于转变到入口/出口布置时,控制器104传输指令信号以激活第二座椅总成336的座椅204从向下展开位置到向上收起位置的转变,如前文所概述。任选地,当处于入口/出口布置时,第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200可以在向前方向上(即,如所描绘在顺时针方向上)致动以提供附加的空间或间隙。在这样的示例中,控制器104将指令信号传输到座椅靠背致动器168并参考座椅靠背位置传感器276来确定座椅靠背200的当前位置、调整座椅靠背200的位置所需的致动程度,和/或确定何时停止致动座椅靠背致动器168。Referring again to FIGS. 22A-23 , when transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the design configuration to the entrance/exit configuration, the controller 104 may refer to the second seat assembly 336 provided by the seat position sensor 280 of the second seat assembly 336 . The current position of the seat 204 into 336 and the program 116 stored in the memory 112 of the controller 104 determine the degree of actuation required to perform at least a portion of the requested adjustment of the passenger compartment 140 . For example, the controller 104 may determine that the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is in a deployed-down position, and that the seat 204 needs to be actuated into a stowed-up position to transition from the design configuration to the entry/exit configuration. Before performing the transition from the design arrangement to the entry/exit arrangement, the controller 104 may reference the occupancy sensor of the second seat assembly 336 to determine that the second seat assembly 336 is not occupied. In the event that an occupant is detected in the second seat assembly 336 while a transition to the entry/exit arrangement has been requested, the request may be adjusted to Users of entry/exit arrangements are provided with prompts, error messages, or other types of notifications. However, upon determining that the second seat assembly 336 is unoccupied and available for transition to the entry/exit configuration, the controller 104 transmits a command signal to activate the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 from the deployed-down position to the Transition to upward stowed position, as outlined previously. Optionally, when in the entry/exit configuration, the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 may be actuated in a forward direction (i.e., in a clockwise direction as depicted) to provide additional space or clearance . In such an example, the controller 104 transmits the command signal to the seat back actuator 168 and references the seat back position sensor 276 to determine the current position of the seat back 200 , the amount of force required to adjust the position of the seat back 200 . the degree of activation, and/or determine when to stop actuating the seat back actuator 168 .
进一步参考图22A至图23,在将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到入口/出口布置时,第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184由控制器104激活,使得第二座椅总成336在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316平移。可以采用导轨传感器136来确定第二座椅总成336沿着导轨系统316的当前位置。可以在联接到导轨系统316的座椅总成124中的每一者(例如,第二座椅总成336)中提供附加传感器,所述附加传感器与导轨传感器136交互使得控制器104可以确定第二座椅总成336相对于导轨传感器136的相对位置。该附加传感器可以与平移致动器184和/或平移位置传感器288集成。控制器104激活平移致动器184,使得平移致动器184在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336,由此减小第一座椅总成332与第二座椅总成336之间的距离,同时还增加第二座椅总成336与第三排152之间的距离。在接收到将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396时,控制器104可以传输指令信号以在步骤552处将第二座椅总成336的座椅204的位置调整到向上收起位置。以同时或顺序的方式,所述过程可以在步骤556处通过激活平移致动器184来开始执行在车辆向前方向上调整第二座椅总成336,并在任选的步骤560处通过激活座椅靠背致动器168发起对第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200的调整以在向前方向上旋转。在至少完成了在步骤552处将座椅204旋转到向上收起位置并在步骤556处在车辆向前方向上致动第二座椅总成336时,可能已经实现了第二布置400。所述过程可以为用户提供预定空闲时间564,所述预定空闲时间对应于允许第三排152的乘员坐在定位在第三排中的座椅总成124内的时间。With further reference to FIGS. 22A-23 , in transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the design configuration to the entrance/exit configuration, the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 is activated by the controller 104 such that the second seat assembly 336 translates along the rail system 316 in the forward direction of the vehicle. Rail sensor 136 may be employed to determine the current position of second seat assembly 336 along rail system 316 . Additional sensors may be provided in each of the seat assemblies 124 coupled to the rail system 316 (eg, the second seat assembly 336) that interact with the rail sensors 136 so that the controller 104 can determine the first The relative position of the two seat assemblies 336 relative to the guide rail sensor 136 . This additional sensor may be integrated with the translation actuator 184 and/or the translation position sensor 288 . The controller 104 activates the translation actuator 184 such that the translation actuator 184 actuates the second seat assembly 336 along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction, thereby reducing the distance between the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 . The distance between the seat assemblies 336 also increases the distance between the second seat assembly 336 and the third row 152 . Upon receiving the prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 , the controller 104 may transmit a command signal to adjust the position of the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 at step 552 to the stowed upward position. In a simultaneous or sequential manner, the process may begin at step 556 by activating the translation actuator 184 to adjust the second seat assembly 336 in the vehicle forward direction, and optionally at step 560 by activating the seat assembly 336 . The seat back actuator 168 initiates adjustment of the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 to rotate in the forward direction. The second arrangement 400 may have been achieved upon completion of at least rotating the seat 204 to the stowed-up position at step 552 and actuating the second seat assembly 336 in the vehicle forward direction at step 556 . The process may provide the user with a predetermined idle time 564 that corresponds to the time an occupant of the third row 152 is allowed to sit within the seat assembly 124 positioned in the third row.
仍然进一步参考图22A至图23,在成功完成对第二布置400的调整和/或经过预定空闲时间564之后,可以向用户呈现询问用户是否想要返回到设计布置的决策点568。在用户在决策点568处选择他们不想要返回到设计布置的情况下,可以在步骤572处退出所述过程,使得将不会再提示乘员或用户退出入口/出口布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,用户可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果用户选择退出入口/出口布置并在决策点568处返回到设计布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从入口/出口布置返回到设计布置。在这样的示例中,用户在决策点568处选择返回到设计布置可以被视为传送到控制器的提示576或请求信号。在从入口/出口布置返回到设计布置时,在步骤580处,通过激活平移致动器184来在车辆向后方向上致动第二座椅总成336。如果在步骤560处第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200在向前方向上旋转,则在返回到设计布置时,第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200可以在任选的步骤584处在向后方向上(即,如所描绘在逆时针方向上)旋转。当第二座椅总成336的座椅204在入口/出口布置期间被置于向上收起位置时,在步骤588处通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在完成步骤580、584和/或588时,乘客舱140已经成功地从入口/出口布置转变回设计布置。Still further referring to FIGS. 22A-23 , after successful completion of adjustments to the second arrangement 400 and/or the elapse of a predetermined idle time 564 , the user may be presented with a decision point 568 asking whether the user wants to return to the design arrangement. In the event that the user selects at decision point 568 that they do not want to return to the design arrangement, the process may be exited at step 572 so that the occupant or user will no longer be prompted to exit the entry/exit arrangement. In such an example, the user may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the user elects to exit the entry/exit arrangement and return to the design arrangement at decision point 568, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return from the entry/exit arrangement to the design arrangement. In such an example, the user's selection to return to the design arrangement at decision point 568 may be considered a prompt 576 or request signal transmitted to the controller. Upon returning from the entry/exit arrangement to the design arrangement, at step 580 the second seat assembly 336 is actuated in the vehicle rearward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 . If the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 was rotated in the forward direction at step 560 , upon returning to the design arrangement, the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 may be rotated in the forward direction at optional step 584 Rotation is in a backward direction (ie, in a counterclockwise direction as depicted). When the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is placed in the stowed-up position during the entry/exit configuration, the second seat assembly 336 is moved to the stowed-up position by activating the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 at step 588 . The seat 204 of the seat assembly 336 is actuated to the deployed downward position. Upon completion of steps 580, 584, and/or 588, the passenger compartment 140 has successfully transitioned from the entrance/exit configuration back to the design configuration.
参考图24A至图25,描绘了根据一个示例的从设计布置(图24A)到货物布置(图24B)的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,诸如设计布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是货物布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。与先前示例一样,相关致动器可以与控制器104通信地耦合。类似地,相关位置传感器可以通信地耦合到控制器104。在所描绘的示例中,采用第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的至少座椅致动器172和平移致动器184来将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到货物布置。在一些示例中,还可以采用第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背致动器168。在所示示例中,导轨传感器136、第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背位置传感器276、第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的座椅位置传感器280和/或第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的平移位置传感器288与控制器104通信地耦合,使得对应传感器向控制器104通知给定部件的当前位置。因此,在接收到将乘客舱140的布置从设计布置调整为货物布置的请求信号时,控制器104可能已经存储了第一座椅总成332沿着导轨系统316的当前位置、第二座椅总成336沿着导轨系统316的当前位置、第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200相对于座椅底座228的当前位置、第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200相对于座椅底座228的当前位置、第一座椅总成332的座椅204相对于座椅底座228的位置、第二座椅总成336的座椅204相对于座椅底座228的位置,并且可能已经(例如,在存储器112的程序116内)存储了第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184将乘客舱140的布置从第一布置392转变到第二布置400所需的旋转次数。Referring to Figures 24A-25, a transition from a design arrangement (Figure 24A) to a cargo arrangement (Figure 24B) is depicted according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, such as a design arrangement. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a cargo arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate the transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 by transmitting command signals to the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 . As with the previous example, the associated actuator may be communicatively coupled with the controller 104 . Similarly, associated position sensors may be communicatively coupled to controller 104 . In the depicted example, at least the seat actuator 172 and the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 are employed to transition the passenger compartment 140 from a design configuration to a cargo configuration. In some examples, the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 may also be employed. In the example shown, the rail sensor 136 , the seat back position sensor 276 of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 , the seat of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 . The chair position sensors 280 and/or the translation position sensors 288 of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 are communicatively coupled with the controller 104 such that the corresponding sensors inform the controller 104 of the current position of a given component. Therefore, upon receiving the request signal to adjust the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the design arrangement to the cargo arrangement, the controller 104 may have stored the current position of the first seat assembly 332 along the rail system 316, the second seat The current position of the assembly 336 along the rail system 316 , the current position of the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 relative to the seat base 228 , the current position of the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 relative to the seat. the current position of the base 228, the position of the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 relative to the seat base 228, the position of the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 relative to the seat base 228, and may have been ( For example, the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 is stored within the program 116 of the memory 112 to transition the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 The number of spins required.
再次参考图24A至图25,在将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到货物布置时,控制器104可以参考由第一座椅总成332的座椅位置传感器280提供的第一座椅总成332的座椅204的当前位置以及存储在控制器104的存储器112内的程序116以确定执行乘客舱140的所请求调整的至少一部分所需要的致动程度。例如,控制器104可以确定第一座椅总成332的座椅204处于向下展开位置,并且需要将座椅204致动到向上收起位置以从设计布置转变到货物布置。在执行从设计布置到货物布置的转变之前,控制器104可以参考第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156以确定第一座椅总成332未被占用。在已经请求转变到货物布置时在第一座椅总成332中检测到乘员的情况下,可以关于由于第一座椅总成332的占用状态而导致这种转变不可用向用户提供提示、错误消息或其他类型的通知。然而,在确定第一座椅总成332未被占用并且可用于转变到货物布置时,控制器104传输指令信号以在步骤592处激活第一座椅总成332的座椅204从向下展开位置到向上收起位置的转变,如前文所概述。在将乘客舱140从设计布置转变到货物布置时,第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184由控制器104激活,使得第一座椅总成332在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316平移。可以采用导轨传感器136来确定第一座椅总成332沿着导轨系统316的当前位置。可以在联接到导轨系统316的座椅总成124中的每一者(例如,第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336)中提供附加传感器,所述附加传感器与导轨传感器136交互使得控制器104可以确定第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336相对于导轨传感器136的相对位置。该附加传感器可以与平移致动器184和/或平移位置传感器288集成。控制器104激活平移致动器184,使得在步骤596处平移致动器184在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332,由此减小第一座椅总成332与仪表板348之间的距离。任选地,当处于货物布置时,在步骤600处第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200可以在向前方向上(即,如所描绘在顺时针方向上)致动以提供附加的空间或间隙。在这样的示例中,控制器104将指令信号传输到座椅靠背致动器168并参考座椅靠背位置传感器276来确定座椅靠背200的当前位置、调整座椅靠背200的位置所需的致动程度,和/或确定何时停止致动座椅靠背致动器168。Referring again to FIGS. 24A-25 , when transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from a design configuration to a cargo configuration, the controller 104 may reference the first seat assembly 332 provided by the seat position sensor 280 of the first seat assembly 332 The current position of the seat 204 and the program 116 stored in the memory 112 of the controller 104 determine the degree of actuation required to perform at least a portion of the requested adjustment of the passenger compartment 140 . For example, the controller 104 may determine that the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is in a deployed-down position and that the seat 204 needs to be actuated to a stowed-up position to transition from the design configuration to the cargo configuration. Before performing the transition from the design arrangement to the cargo arrangement, the controller 104 may refer to the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 to determine that the first seat assembly 332 is not occupied. In the event that an occupant is detected in the first seat assembly 332 when a transition to the cargo arrangement has been requested, a prompt, error, or error may be provided to the user regarding the unavailability of such transition due to the occupied state of the first seat assembly 332 messages or other types of notifications. However, upon determining that the first seat assembly 332 is unoccupied and available for transition to a cargo configuration, the controller 104 transmits a command signal to activate the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 to deploy from the downward direction at step 592 Position transition to an upward stowed position, as outlined previously. When transitioning the passenger compartment 140 from the design configuration to the cargo configuration, the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 is activated by the controller 104 such that the first seat assembly 332 follows the rail system in the vehicle forward direction. 316 pan. Rail sensor 136 may be employed to determine the current position of first seat assembly 332 along rail system 316 . Additional sensors may be provided in each of the seat assemblies 124 coupled to the rail system 316 (eg, the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 ), which additional sensors are consistent with the rail sensors 136 The interaction allows the controller 104 to determine the relative positions of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 relative to the rail sensor 136 . This additional sensor may be integrated with the translation actuator 184 and/or the translation position sensor 288 . The controller 104 activates the translation actuator 184 such that at step 596 the translation actuator 184 actuates the first seat assembly 332 along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction, thereby reducing the first seat assembly The distance between 332 and the instrument panel 348. Optionally, when in cargo configuration, the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated in a forward direction (ie, in a clockwise direction as depicted) at step 600 to provide additional space. or gap. In such an example, the controller 104 transmits the command signal to the seat back actuator 168 and references the seat back position sensor 276 to determine the current position of the seat back 200 , the amount of force required to adjust the position of the seat back 200 . the degree of activation, and/or determine when to stop actuating the seat back actuator 168 .
进一步参考图24A至图25,类似地针对第二座椅总成336执行用于调整第一座椅总成332的位置以实现从设计布置到货物布置的转变的过程。例如,第二座椅总成336可以与第二座椅总成336从上述设计布置转变到入口/出口布置的方式几乎相同的方式进行调整,主要区别在于第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184对第二座椅总成336沿着导轨系统316的致动程度。简而言之,在步骤604处,通过从控制器104传输的指令信号将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向上收起位置;在步骤608处,激活第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184使得第二座椅总成336在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动,由此减小第二座椅总成336与仪表板348之间的距离,同时还增加第二座椅总成336与第三排152之间的距离;并且任选地,在步骤612处,通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背致动器168来在向前方向上(即,如所描绘在顺时针方向上)致动第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200。在完成针对第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336概述的调整时,乘客舱140的布置已经成功地置于货物布置。所述过程可以向用户提供预定空闲时间616,所述预定空闲时间对应于允许乘员坐在第三排152、第三座椅总成340、第四座椅总成344和/或允许用户将货物置于乘客舱140的地板320上的时间。With further reference to FIGS. 24A-25 , the process for adjusting the position of the first seat assembly 332 to effect a transition from a design arrangement to a cargo arrangement is similarly performed for the second seat assembly 336 . For example, the second seat assembly 336 may be adjusted in much the same manner as the second seat assembly 336 is converted from the design arrangement described above to an entrance/exit arrangement, with the primary difference being the translational effects of the second seat assembly 336 . The extent to which the actuator 184 actuates the second seat assembly 336 along the rail system 316 . Briefly, at step 604, the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated to the stowed upward position by the command signal transmitted from the controller 104; at step 608, the second seat assembly is activated. The translational actuator 184 of 336 causes the second seat assembly 336 to be actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction, thereby reducing the distance between the second seat assembly 336 and the instrument panel 348 while simultaneously The distance between the second seat assembly 336 and the third row 152 is also increased; and optionally, at step 612 , by activating the seatback actuator 168 of the second seat assembly 336 in the forward direction. The seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated upward (ie, in the clockwise direction as depicted). Upon completion of the adjustments outlined for the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 , the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 has been successfully placed in a cargo arrangement. The process may provide the user with a predetermined idle time 616 corresponding to allowing the occupants to sit in the third row 152, the third seat assembly 340, the fourth seat assembly 344 and/or allowing the user to transfer cargo. The time of placement on the floor 320 of the passenger compartment 140 .
仍然进一步参考图24A至图25,在成功完成对第二布置400的调整和/或经过预定空闲时间616之后,可以向用户呈现询问用户是否想要返回到设计布置的决策点620。在用户在决策点620处选择他们不想要返回到设计布置的情况下,可以在步骤624处退出所述过程,使得将不会再提示用户退出货物布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,用户可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果用户选择退出货物布置并在决策点620处返回到设计布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从货物布置返回到设计布置。在这样的示例中,用户在决策点620处选择返回到设计布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示628或请求信号。在从货物布置返回到设计布置时,在步骤632处,通过激活平移致动器184来在车辆向后方向上致动第二座椅总成336。如果在步骤612处第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200在向前方向上旋转,则在返回到设计布置时,第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200可以在步骤636处在向后方向上(即,如所描绘在逆时针方向上)旋转。当第二座椅总成336的座椅204在货物布置期间被置于向上收起位置时,在步骤640处通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。类似地,在从货物布置返回到设计布置时,在步骤640处,通过激活平移致动器184来在车辆向后方向上致动第一座椅总成332。如果在步骤600处第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200在向前方向上旋转,则在返回到设计布置时,第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200可以在步骤648处在向后方向上(即,如所描绘在逆时针方向上)旋转。当第一座椅总成332的座椅204在货物布置期间被置于向上收起位置时,在步骤652处通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在完成步骤632、636、640、644、648和/或652时,乘客舱140已经成功地从货物布置转变回设计布置。Still further referring to FIGS. 24A-25 , after successful completion of adjustments to the second arrangement 400 and/or the elapse of a predetermined idle time 616 , the user may be presented with a decision point 620 asking whether the user wants to return to the design arrangement. In the event that the user selects at decision point 620 that they do not want to return to the design arrangement, the process may be exited at step 624 so that the user will no longer be prompted to exit the cargo arrangement. In such an example, the user may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the user elects to exit the cargo arrangement and return to the design arrangement at decision point 620, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return from the cargo arrangement to the design arrangement. In such an example, the user's selection to return to the design arrangement at decision point 620 may be considered a prompt 628 or request signal transmitted to the controller 104 . Upon returning from the cargo configuration to the design configuration, at step 632 , the second seat assembly 336 is actuated in the vehicle rearward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 . If the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 rotates in the forward direction at step 612, the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 may rotate in the forward direction at step 636 when returning to the design arrangement. Rotate in the rear direction (ie, in the counterclockwise direction as depicted). When the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is placed in the stowed-up position during cargo deployment, the second seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is moved up by activating the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 at step 640 . The seat 204 of the assembly 336 is actuated into the deployed downward position. Similarly, upon returning from the cargo arrangement to the design arrangement, at step 640 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated in the vehicle rearward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 . If the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 rotates in the forward direction at step 600, the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may rotate in the forward direction at step 648 when returning to the design arrangement. Rotate in the rear direction (ie, in the counterclockwise direction as depicted). When the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is placed in the stowed-up position during cargo deployment, the first seat is moved 652 by activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 . The seat 204 of the assembly 332 is actuated to the deployed downward position. Upon completion of steps 632, 636, 640, 644, 648, and/or 652, the passenger compartment 140 has successfully transitioned from the cargo configuration back to the design configuration.
参考图26,描绘了用于将乘客舱140的布置从第一布置392调整到第二布置400的过程,其中第一布置392是儿童看护布置并且第二布置400是儿童座椅布置。从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变可以由从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396发起。将乘客舱140的布置从儿童看护布置转变到儿童座椅布置包括在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332的步骤632。另外,从儿童看护布置到儿童座椅布置的转变包括将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置的步骤636。此外,乘客舱140的布置从儿童看护布置到儿童座椅布置的转变包括步骤640:在致动第三座椅总成340时使第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268在顺时针方向或逆时针方向上旋转约九十度(90°)的角度。在完成步骤640时,乘客舱140的布置将已经成功地置于儿童座椅布置的第二布置400中。与将乘客舱140的布置调整为儿童座椅布置的先前描述的示例一样,可以提供预定空闲时间644以允许用户将儿童或身材较小的乘员置于第二座椅总成336或第三座椅总成340内,这视情况而定。替代地,乘客舱140的布置可以维持处于儿童座椅布置,直到用户与用户界面120交互或以其他方式向控制器104传送请求信号以退出儿童座椅布置。在完成乘客舱140的布置从儿童看护布置到儿童座椅布置的转变和/或经过预定空闲时间644时,可以向用户呈现决策点648,其中用户被提示他们是否希望返回到儿童看护布置。在用户选择不返回到儿童看护布置的情况下,可以在步骤652处退出所述过程,使得将不会次再提示用户退出儿童座椅布置。然而,如果用户选择退出儿童座椅布置并在决策点648处返回到儿童看护布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以返回到儿童看护布置。在这样的示例中,用户在决策点648处选择返回到儿童看护布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示656或请求信号。在从儿童座椅布置返回到儿童看护布置时,在步骤660处,第二座椅总成336可以逆时针旋转约九十度(90°),使得第二座椅总成336被取向成面向前取向。另外,在乘客舱140的布置转变回儿童看护布置时,步骤664将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。最后,在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332的步骤668可以完成从儿童座椅布置回到儿童看护布置的转变。Referring to FIG. 26 , depicted is a process for adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from a first arrangement 392 to a second arrangement 400 , where the first arrangement 392 is a child care arrangement and the second arrangement 400 is a child seat arrangement. The transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 may be initiated by a prompt 396 to transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . Transitioning the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from a child care arrangement to a child seat arrangement includes the step 632 of actuating the first seat assembly 332 along the rail system 316 in the forward direction of the vehicle. Additionally, transitioning from a child care arrangement to a child seat arrangement includes step 636 of actuating the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 to a downwardly deployed position. Additionally, transitioning the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from a child care arrangement to a child seat arrangement includes step 640 of moving the second seat assembly 336 clockwise about its vertical axis 268 upon actuating the third seat assembly 340 . direction or counterclockwise by an angle of approximately ninety degrees (90°). Upon completion of step 640, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will have been successfully placed in the second arrangement 400 of child seat arrangements. As with the previously described example of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 to a child seat arrangement, a predetermined idle time 644 may be provided to allow the user to place a child or smaller occupant in the second seat assembly 336 or the third seat. Within the chair assembly 340, this depends on the situation. Alternatively, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 may remain in the child seat arrangement until the user interacts with the user interface 120 or otherwise transmits a request signal to the controller 104 to exit the child seat arrangement. Upon completion of the transition of the passenger compartment 140 arrangement from the child care arrangement to the child seat arrangement and/or the predetermined idle time 644 has elapsed, the user may be presented with a decision point 648 in which the user is prompted whether they wish to return to the child care arrangement. In the event that the user chooses not to return to the child care arrangement, the process may be exited at step 652 so that the user will not be prompted again to exit the child seat arrangement. However, if the user elects to exit the child seat arrangement and return to the child care arrangement at decision point 648, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return to the child care arrangement. In such an example, the user's selection to return to the child care arrangement at decision point 648 may be considered a prompt 656 or request signal transmitted to the controller 104 . When returning from the child seat arrangement to the child care arrangement, at step 660, the second seat assembly 336 may be rotated counterclockwise approximately ninety degrees (90°) such that the second seat assembly 336 is oriented to face forward orientation. Additionally, step 664 actuates the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 to the stowed-up position when the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is transitioned back to the child care arrangement. Finally, step 668 of actuating the first seat assembly 332 along the rail system 316 in the vehicle rearward direction may complete the transition from the child seat arrangement back to the child care arrangement.
参考图27,描绘了从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变,其中第一布置392是儿童看护布置并且第二布置400是放松布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在从儿童看护布置转变到放松布置时,执行在车辆向前方向上致动第一座椅总成332的步骤672。另外,可以任选地采用将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置的步骤676。无论在步骤676处是否将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置,都在步骤680处执行在向后方向上(例如,如所描绘在逆时针方向上)致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200的步骤680。在一些示例中,转变到放松布置可以包括在步骤684处在向上方向上相对于第一座椅总成332的座椅底座228致动第一座椅总成332的座椅204。在各种示例中,转变到放松布置可以包括步骤688:将小腿支撑件208致动到至少部分延伸位置。在完成步骤680、684和/或688时,乘客舱140的布置可能已经达到放松布置。如上文关于放松布置所概述,可以为第一座椅总成332的乘员提供预定空闲时间692。可以由第一座椅总成332的乘员选择预定空闲时间692。例如,第一座椅总成332的乘员可以决定他们希望在他们占用车辆100期间休息给定时间段。因此,在经过了空闲时间692时,可以向第一座椅总成332的乘员提示他们是否想要返回到儿童看护布置,由此提供决策点696。替代地,第一座椅总成332的乘员可以选择在经过空闲时间692时要返回到的乘客舱140的替代布置。Referring to Figure 27, a transition from a first arrangement 392 to a second arrangement 400 is depicted, where the first arrangement 392 is a childcare arrangement and the second arrangement 400 is a relaxation arrangement. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . Upon transitioning from the child care arrangement to the relaxation arrangement, step 672 of actuating the first seat assembly 332 in the vehicle forward direction is performed. Additionally, step 676 of actuating the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 into a downwardly deployed position may optionally be employed. Regardless of whether the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated to the downwardly deployed position at step 676 , actuation in the rearward direction (eg, in the counterclockwise direction as depicted) is performed at step 680 Step 680 of seat back 200 of first seat assembly 332 . In some examples, transitioning to the relaxed configuration may include actuating the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 in an upward direction relative to the seat base 228 of the first seat assembly 332 at step 684 . In various examples, transitioning to the relaxed configuration may include step 688 of actuating calf support 208 to an at least partially extended position. Upon completion of steps 680, 684, and/or 688, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 may have reached a relaxed arrangement. As outlined above with respect to the relaxation arrangement, the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 may be provided with a predetermined idle time 692 . The predetermined idle time 692 may be selected by the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 . For example, the occupants of the first seat assembly 332 may decide that they wish to rest for a given period of time while they occupy the vehicle 100 . Accordingly, when the idle time 692 has elapsed, the occupants of the first seat assembly 332 may be prompted as to whether they wish to return to the child care arrangement, thereby providing a decision point 696. Alternatively, the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 may select an alternative arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 to return to when the idle time 692 has elapsed.
再次参考图27,关于决策点696,在第一座椅总成332的乘员选择不返回到儿童看护布置或另一种布置的情况下,所述过程可以在步骤700处退出,使得将不会再次提示乘员退出放松布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,第一座椅总成332的乘员可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果第一座椅总成332的乘员选择退出放松布置并在决策点696处返回到儿童看护布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从放松布置返回到儿童看护布置。在这样的示例中,第一座椅总成332的乘员选择返回到儿童看护布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示704或请求信号。在从放松布置返回到儿童看护布置时,如果第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208在步骤688处已经被致动远离缩回位置,则可以在步骤708处将小腿支撑件208致动到缩回位置。类似地,如果在步骤684处在向上方向上相对于第一座椅总成332的座椅底座228致动了第一座椅总成332的座椅204,则在步骤712处可以在向下方向上致动第一座椅总成332的座椅204以减小座椅204相对于第一座椅总成332的座椅底座228的倾斜角度。在步骤716处,在向前方向上(即,在顺时针方向上,如前述附图中所描绘)致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。如果在步骤676处在向下方向上朝向向下展开位置致动第二座椅总成336的座椅204,则使乘客舱140的布置返回到儿童看护布置可以包括在向上方向上朝向向上收起位置致动第二座椅总成336的座椅204的步骤720。在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332的步骤724可以完成将乘客舱140的布置从放松布置回到儿童看护布置的转变。Referring again to FIG. 27 , with respect to decision point 696 , in the event that the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 elects not to return to the child care arrangement or another arrangement, the process may exit at step 700 such that no The occupants are again prompted to exit the relaxation configuration. In such an example, the occupant of first seat assembly 332 may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the occupant of the first seat assembly 332 elects to exit the relaxed arrangement and return to the childcare arrangement at decision point 696, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return from the relaxed arrangement to the childcare arrangement. . In such an example, the occupant's selection of the first seat assembly 332 to return to the child care arrangement may be considered a prompt 704 or request signal transmitted to the controller 104 . Upon returning from the relaxed configuration to the child care arrangement, the calf support 208 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated at step 708 if it has been actuated away from the retracted position at step 688 to the retracted position. Similarly, if the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated in an upward direction relative to the seat base 228 of the first seat assembly 332 at step 684, then the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated in a downward direction at step 712. The seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated upward to reduce the tilt angle of the seat 204 relative to the seat base 228 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 716 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated in a forward direction (ie, in a clockwise direction, as depicted in the previous figures). If the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated in the downward direction toward the downward deployed position at step 676 , returning the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 to the child care arrangement may include stowing in the upward direction toward the upward direction. Step 720 of positionally actuating the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 . The step 724 of actuating the first seat assembly 332 along the rail system 316 in the rearward direction of the vehicle may complete transitioning the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from a relaxing arrangement back to a child care arrangement.
参考图28,概述了根据一个示例的从儿童座椅布置到放松布置的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,其是本示例中的儿童座椅布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是放松布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。响应于由控制器104传送的指令信号,在步骤728处,通过激活第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180来使第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268旋转。在完成步骤728时,第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336可以各自定位于面向前取向。当进入第一座椅总成332的放松布置时,第二座椅总成336的座椅204可以任选地置于向上收起位置。然而,第一座椅总成332的放松布置可以独立于第二座椅总成336的座椅204是处于向上收起位置、向下展开位置还是其间的中间位置来实现。在将第一座椅总成332转变到放松布置时,在步骤732处,通过控制器104激活座椅靠背致动器168来在向后方向上致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在各种示例中,在步骤736处,可以经由通过控制器104激活座椅致动器172来在向上方向上致动第一座椅总成332的座椅204。类似地,在步骤740处,通过由控制器104激活小腿支撑件致动器176,可以将第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208从缩回位置朝向延伸位置致动。在完成步骤732、736和/或740时,乘客舱140的布置已经成功转变到放松布置。在各种示例中,在完成到放松布置的转变之后,可以为所述过程提供预定空闲时间744,如上文所概述。Referring to Figure 28, a transition from a child seat arrangement to a relaxation arrangement is outlined, according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, which is a child seat arrangement in this example. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a relaxed arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 400 transformation. In response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104, at step 728, the second seat assembly 336 is rotated about its vertical axis 268 by activating the rotation actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336. Upon completing step 728, the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 may each be positioned in a forward-facing orientation. When entering the relaxed configuration of the first seat assembly 332, the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 may optionally be placed in the stowed-up position. However, the relaxed arrangement of the first seat assembly 332 may be accomplished independently of whether the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is in an upwardly stowed position, a downwardly deployed position, or an intermediate position therebetween. Upon transitioning the first seat assembly 332 to the relaxed configuration, at step 732 , the seatback actuator 168 is activated by the controller 104 to actuate the seatback of the first seat assembly 332 in the rearward direction. 200. In various examples, at step 736 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated in the upward direction via activation of the seat actuator 172 by the controller 104 . Similarly, at step 740 , the calf support 208 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated from the retracted position toward the extended position by activating the calf support actuator 176 by the controller 104 . Upon completion of steps 732, 736, and/or 740, the configuration of the passenger compartment 140 has been successfully transitioned to the relaxed configuration. In various examples, the process may be provided with a predetermined idle time 744 after completing the transition to the relaxation arrangement, as outlined above.
再次参考图28,在完成到放松布置的转变和/或预定空闲时间744到期之后,控制器104可以在决策点748处提示用户是否将乘客舱140返回到儿童座椅布置或另一种替代布置。如果用户选择不将乘客舱140的布置返回到儿童座椅布置或替代布置,则可以在步骤752处退出所述过程。然而,如果用户选择退出放松布置并在决策点748处返回到儿童座椅布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从放松布置返回到儿童座椅布置。在这样的示例中,用户在决策点748处选择将乘客舱140返回到儿童座椅布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示756或请求信号。在从放松布置返回到儿童座椅布置时,如果第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208在任选的步骤740处展开,则可以在任选的步骤760处将第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208返回到缩回位置。类似地,如果在任选的步骤736处在向上方向上致动第一座椅总成332的座椅204,则在步骤764处可以在向下方向上致动第一座椅总成332的第一座椅204。在步骤768处使第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200在向前方向上旋转,使得座椅靠背200恢复到比处于放松布置时更直立的位置。在步骤772处,第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约九十度(90°),使得第二座椅总成336的座椅表面350被呈现给车辆100的通道门312中的一个通道门并且紧邻该通道门。在完成步骤760、764、768和/或772时,乘客舱140将已经成功地从放松布置转变到儿童座椅布置。Referring again to FIG. 28 , upon completion of the transition to the relaxed arrangement and/or expiration of the predetermined idle time 744 , the controller 104 may prompt the user at decision point 748 whether to return the passenger compartment 140 to a child seat arrangement or another alternative. layout. If the user chooses not to return the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 to the child seat arrangement or an alternative arrangement, the process may be exited at step 752 . However, if the user elects to exit the relaxed arrangement and returns to the child seat arrangement at decision point 748, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return from the relaxed arrangement to the child seat arrangement. In such an example, the user's selection to return the passenger compartment 140 to the child seat arrangement at decision point 748 may be considered a prompt 756 or request signal transmitted to the controller 104 . Upon returning from the relaxed configuration to the child seat configuration, if the calf support 208 of the first seat assembly 332 is deployed at optional step 740 , the first seat assembly 332 may be placed in the child seat configuration at optional step 760 . Calf support 208 returns 332 to the retracted position. Similarly, if the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated in an upward direction at optional step 736 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated in a downward direction at step 764 . One seat 204. The seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is rotated in the forward direction at step 768 such that the seat back 200 returns to a more upright position than in the relaxed configuration. At step 772 , the second seat assembly 336 is rotated approximately ninety degrees (90°) about its vertical axis 268 such that the seating surface 350 of the second seat assembly 336 is presented to the access door 312 of the vehicle 100 An access door in and immediately adjacent to the access door. Upon completion of steps 760, 764, 768, and/or 772, the passenger cabin 140 will have successfully transitioned from the relaxed configuration to the child seat configuration.
参考图29,概述了根据一个过程的从入口/出口布置到儿童看护布置的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,其是本示例中的入口/出口布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是儿童看护布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。由于控制器104传送的信号,在步骤776处,激活第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184使得在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336。另外,由控制器104激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172使得在步骤780处将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在其中当将乘客舱140置于入口/出口布置时在向前方向上致动第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200的示例中,所述过程可以任选地包括激活第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背致动器168,使得在步骤784处在向后方向上移动第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200。在步骤788处,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184,使得平移致动器184在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在完成对乘客舱140的所概述调整时,乘客舱140的布置已经从入口/出口布置转变到儿童看护布置。如上面关于儿童看护布置所概述的,可以提供预定空闲时间792。在完成到儿童看护布置的转变和/或预定空闲时间792到期之后,控制器104可以在决策点796处提示用户是否将乘客舱140返回到入口/出口布置或另一种替代布置。如果用户选择不将乘客舱140的布置返回到入口/出口布置,则可以在步骤800处退出所述过程。替代地,如果用户选择退出儿童看护布置并在决策点796处返回到入口/出口布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以返回到入口/出口布置。在这样的示例中,用户在决策点796处选择将乘客舱140返回到入口/出口布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示804或请求信号。Referring to Figure 29, a transition from an entrance/exit arrangement to a childcare arrangement according to one process is outlined. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, which is an entrance/exit arrangement in this example. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a childcare arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 400 transformation. As a result of the signal transmitted by the controller 104 , at step 776 , the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 is activated causing the second seat assembly 336 to be actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle rearward direction. Additionally, activation of the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 by the controller 104 causes the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 to be actuated to the deployed-down position at step 780 . In examples in which the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated in the forward direction when the passenger compartment 140 is placed in the entrance/exit configuration, the process may optionally include activating the second seat assembly. The seat back actuator 168 at step 336 moves the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 in the rearward direction at step 784 . At step 788 , the controller 104 activates the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 such that the translation actuator 184 actuates the first seat assembly 332 in a vehicle rearward direction along the rail system 316 . Upon completion of the outlined adjustments to the passenger compartment 140, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 has been transitioned from an entrance/exit arrangement to a child care arrangement. As outlined above with regard to childcare arrangements, scheduled availability 792 may be provided. After the transition to the childcare arrangement is completed and/or the scheduled idle time 792 expires, the controller 104 may prompt the user at decision point 796 whether to return the passenger cabin 140 to the entry/exit arrangement or another alternative arrangement. If the user chooses not to return the passenger compartment 140 arrangement to the entry/exit arrangement, the process may be exited at step 800 . Alternatively, if the user elects to exit the childcare arrangement and return to the entry/exit arrangement at decision point 796, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return to the entry/exit arrangement. In such an example, the user's selection to return the passenger compartment 140 to the entrance/exit arrangement at decision point 796 may be considered a prompt 804 or request signal transmitted to the controller 104 .
再次参考图29,在从儿童看护布置返回到入口/出口布置时,在步骤808处,经由通过从控制器104接收的指令信号激活平移致动器184来在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。另外,通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172在步骤812处将第二座椅总成336的座椅204朝向向上收起位置致动。在各种示例中,通过响应于来自控制器104的对应指令信号激活第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背致动器168,可以在任选的步骤816处在向前方向上致动第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200。在步骤820处,通过响应于来自控制器104的对应指令信号激活第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184,在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336。在完成对第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的调整之后,乘客舱140已经成功地从儿童看护布置转变回入口/出口布置。Referring again to FIG. 29 , upon returning from the child care arrangement to the entry/exit arrangement, at step 808 , the translation actuator 184 is activated in the vehicle forward direction along the guide rail system 316 via a command signal received from the controller 104 The first seat assembly 332 is actuated. Additionally, the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated toward the stowed upward position at step 812 by activating the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 . In various examples, the second seat assembly 336 may be actuated in the forward direction at optional step 816 by activating the seatback actuator 168 of the second seat assembly 336 in response to a corresponding command signal from the controller 104 . Seat back 200 of seat assembly 336. At step 820 , the second seat assembly 336 is actuated in the vehicle forward direction along the rail system 316 by activating the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 in response to a corresponding command signal from the controller 104 . After completing the adjustments to the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336, the passenger compartment 140 has successfully transitioned from a child care arrangement back to an entrance/exit arrangement.
参考图30,概述了根据一个示例的从货物布置到儿童座椅布置的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,其是本示例中的货物布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是儿童座椅布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。响应于由控制器104传送的指令信号,通过激活第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184在步骤824处在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336。在步骤828处,通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172将第二座椅总成336的座椅204朝向向下展开位置致动。任选地,通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背致动器168,可以在步骤832处在向后方向上致动第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200。在步骤836处,响应于由控制器104传输的指令信号,可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184来在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤840处,响应于由控制器104传送的指令信号,通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172来在向下方向上将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在步骤844处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200可以任选地在向后方向上致动。在步骤848处,响应于由控制器104传送的指令信号,由于第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180的激活,第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268在顺时针方向上旋转约九十度(90°)。在完成步骤848时,乘客舱140的布置已经成功地置于儿童座椅布置中。与本文概述的先前示例一样,可以为所述过程提供预定空闲时间852,所述预定空闲时间可以对应于用于使第二座椅总成336的乘员坐下的预期时间量。Referring to Figure 30, a transition from a cargo arrangement to a child seat arrangement is outlined, according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, which is the cargo arrangement in this example. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a child seat arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 400 transformation. In response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 , the second seat assembly 336 is actuated in the vehicle rearward direction along the rail system 316 at step 824 by activating the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 . At step 828 , the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated toward the downwardly deployed position by activating the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 . Optionally, the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 may be actuated in the rearward direction at step 832 by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the second seat assembly 336 . At step 836 , in response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 , the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated in the vehicle rearward direction along the rail system 316 by activating the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 . into 332. At step 840 , in response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is aligned in the downward direction by activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 . Move to the extended downward position. At step 844 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may optionally be actuated in a rearward direction by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 848, in response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104, the second seat assembly 336 rotates in a clockwise direction about its vertical axis 268 due to activation of the rotational actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336. Rotate up approximately ninety degrees (90°). Upon completion of step 848, the passenger compartment 140 arrangement has been successfully placed in the child seat arrangement. As with the previous examples outlined herein, the process may be provided with a predetermined idle time 852 , which may correspond to an expected amount of time for seating an occupant of the second seat assembly 336 .
再次参考图30,在将乘客舱140成功地调整到儿童座椅布置和/或预定空闲时间852到期时,控制器104可以在决策点856处提示用户是否将乘客舱140返回到货物布置或另一种替代布置。如果用户选择不将乘客舱140的布置返回到货物布置或替代布置,则可以在步骤860处退出所述过程。然而,如果用户选择退出儿童座椅布置并在决策点856处返回到货物布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从儿童座椅布置返回到货物布置。在这样的示例中,用户在决策点856处选择将乘客舱140返回到货物布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示864或请求信号。在返回到货物布置时,通过激活第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180,在步骤868处第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268在逆时针方向上旋转约九十度(90°)。在步骤872处,响应于由控制器104传输的指令信号,通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。在步骤876处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200可以任选地向前移动或在向前方向上旋转。在步骤880中,通过激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184,在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤884处,通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。在步骤888处,通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背致动器168,第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200任选地在车辆向前方向上旋转。在步骤892处,通过响应于由控制器104传送的指令信号激活第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184,在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336。在完成针对第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的所概述调整时,乘客舱140的布置已经返回到货物布置。Referring again to FIG. 30 , upon successful adjustment of the passenger compartment 140 to the child seat configuration and/or expiration of the predetermined idle time 852 , the controller 104 may prompt the user at decision point 856 whether to return the passenger compartment 140 to the cargo configuration or Another alternative arrangement. If the user chooses not to return the passenger compartment 140 arrangement to the cargo arrangement or an alternative arrangement, the process may be exited at step 860 . However, if the user elects to exit the child seat arrangement and return to the cargo arrangement at decision point 856, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return from the child seat arrangement to the cargo arrangement. In such an example, the user's selection to return the passenger compartment 140 to the cargo arrangement at decision point 856 may be considered a prompt 864 or request signal transmitted to the controller 104 . Upon returning to the cargo arrangement, the second seat assembly 336 is rotated approximately ninety degrees in a counterclockwise direction about its vertical axis 268 at step 868 by activating the rotation actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 (90°). At step 872 , in response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated to stow upward by activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 Location. At step 876 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may optionally move forward or rotate in a forward direction by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . In step 880 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 884 , the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated to the stowed-up position by activating the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 . At step 888 , the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 is optionally rotated in the vehicle forward direction by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the second seat assembly 336 . At step 892 , the second seat assembly 336 is actuated in the vehicle forward direction along the rail system 316 by activating the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 in response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 . Upon completion of the outlined adjustments to the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 , the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 has returned to the cargo arrangement.
参考图31,概述了根据一个示例的从货物布置到放松布置的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,其是本示例中的货物布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是放松布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。响应于由控制器104传送的指令信号,通过激活第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184在步骤896处在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336。在其中对于货物布置在向前方向上致动第二座椅总成336的座椅200的示例中,通过响应于来自控制器104的指令信号激活座椅靠背致动器168,可以采用步骤900以使第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200在向后方向上旋转。在步骤904处,响应于来自控制器104的指令信号,通过激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184来在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤908处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172将第一座椅总成332的座椅204朝向向下展开位置致动。当在步骤908处朝向向下展开位置致动座椅204时,第一座椅总成332的座椅204可以停止在向上收起位置与向下展开位置之间的中间位置处,使得与向下展开位置相比,座椅204相对于第一座椅总成332的座椅底座228处于更大的倾斜程度。在步骤912处,通过激活座椅靠背致动器168来在向后方向上并远离第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200(例如,致动到相对于第一座椅总成332的座椅底座228成钝角)。在步骤916处,第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208可以通过激活小腿支撑件致动器176任选地从缩回位置延伸,前提是用户通过由控制器104传输的指令信号指示这样做。在完成步骤908、912和/或916时,乘客舱140的布置已经成功转变到放松布置。在各种示例中,在完成到放松布置的转变之后,可以为所述过程提供预定空闲时间920,如上文所概述。Referring to Figure 31, a transition from a cargo arrangement to a relaxed arrangement is outlined, according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, which is the cargo arrangement in this example. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a relaxed arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 400 transformation. In response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 , the second seat assembly 336 is actuated along the rail system 316 in a vehicle rearward direction at step 896 by activating the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 . In an example where the seat 200 actuates the second seat assembly 336 in the forward direction for cargo deployment, step 900 may be employed by activating the seat back actuator 168 in response to a command signal from the controller 104 to The seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 is rotated in the rearward direction. At step 904 , in response to the command signal from the controller 104 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated in the vehicle rearward direction along the rail system 316 by activating the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 908 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated toward the downwardly deployed position by activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 . When the seat 204 is actuated toward the downwardly deployed position at step 908 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be stopped at an intermediate position between the upwardly stowed position and the downwardly deployed position such that the seat 204 is aligned with the downwardly deployed position. Compared to the lower deployed position, the seat 204 is at a greater degree of inclination relative to the seat base 228 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 912 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated in a rearward direction and away from the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 (e.g., to (moved to an obtuse angle relative to the seat base 228 of the first seat assembly 332). At step 916 , the calf support 208 of the first seat assembly 332 may optionally be extended from the retracted position by activating the calf support actuator 176 if the user indicates so via a command signal transmitted by the controller 104 Do. Upon completion of steps 908, 912, and/or 916, the configuration of the passenger compartment 140 has been successfully transitioned to the relaxed configuration. In various examples, the process may be provided with a predetermined idle time 920 after completing the transition to the relaxation arrangement, as outlined above.
再次参考图31,在完成到放松布置的转变和/或预定空闲时间920到期之后,控制器104可以在决策点924处提示用户是否将乘客舱140返回到货物布置或另一种替代布置。如果用户选择不将乘客舱140的布置返回到货物布置或替代布置,则可以在步骤928处退出所述过程。然而,如果用户选择退出放松布置并在决策点924处返回到货物布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从放松布置返回到货物布置。在这样的示例中,用户在决策点924处选择将乘客舱140返回到货物布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示932或请求信号。在从放松布置返回到货物布置时,如果第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208在任选的步骤916处展开,则可以在任选的步骤936处将第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208返回到缩回位置。在步骤940处,将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。在步骤944处使第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200在向前方向上旋转,使得座椅靠背200恢复到比处于放松布置时更直立的位置。在步骤948处,在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤952处,第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200可以任选地在向前方向上旋转。在步骤956处,在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336。在完成步骤932、936、940、944、948、952和/或956时,已经完成从放松布置返回到货物布置。Referring again to FIG. 31 , upon completion of the transition to the relaxed configuration and/or expiration of the predetermined idle time 920 , the controller 104 may prompt the user at decision point 924 whether to return the passenger compartment 140 to the cargo configuration or another alternative configuration. If the user chooses not to return the passenger compartment 140 arrangement to the cargo arrangement or an alternate arrangement, the process may be exited at step 928 . However, if the user elects to exit the relaxed arrangement and return to the cargo arrangement at decision point 924, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return from the relaxed arrangement to the cargo arrangement. In such an example, the user's selection to return the passenger compartment 140 to the cargo arrangement at decision point 924 may be considered a prompt 932 or request signal transmitted to the controller 104 . Upon returning from the relaxed configuration to the cargo configuration, if the lower leg supports 208 of the first seat assembly 332 are deployed at optional step 916 , the lower leg supports 208 of the first seat assembly 332 may be deployed at optional step 936 . Calf support 208 returns to the retracted position. At step 940, the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated to the stowed-up position. The seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is rotated in the forward direction at step 944 such that the seat back 200 returns to a more upright position than in the relaxed configuration. At step 948, the first seat assembly 332 is actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction. At step 952 , the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 may optionally rotate in a forward direction. At step 956, the second seat assembly 336 is actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction. Upon completion of steps 932, 936, 940, 944, 948, 952, and/or 956, the return from the relaxation arrangement to the cargo arrangement has been completed.
参考图32,描绘了根据一个示例的从社交布置到儿童看护布置的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,其是本示例中的社交布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是儿童看护布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。响应于由控制器104传输的指令信号,如果基于从第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156接收的输入,第一座椅总成332未被占用,则通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172在步骤936处将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。如果确定第一座椅总成332被占用,则可以省略步骤936。在步骤940处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200朝向第一座椅总成332的座椅204旋转。在步骤944处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180,第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约一百八十度(180°),使得第一座椅总成332置于面向前取向。在步骤948处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184,在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤952处,通过激活座椅靠背致动器168,可以远离第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤956处,如果第一座椅总成332被确定为未被占用并且执行步骤936,则通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172来将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在步骤960处,可以通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。在完成上文概述的步骤时,在各种示例中,乘客舱140已经从社交布置转变到儿童看护布置。如先前所概述,在进入儿童看护布置时,可以向用户提供预定空闲时间964。Referring to Figure 32, a transition from a social arrangement to a child care arrangement is depicted according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, which is the social arrangement in this example. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a child care arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 400 transformation. In response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 , if the first seat assembly 332 is not occupied based on input received from the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 , then by activating the first seat assembly 332 The seat actuator 172 actuates the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 to the stowed-up position at step 936 . If it is determined that the first seat assembly 332 is occupied, step 936 may be omitted. At step 940 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is rotated toward the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 944, by activating the rotation actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332, the first seat assembly 332 rotates about its vertical axis 268 approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) such that the first seat assembly 332 rotates approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) about its vertical axis 268. The chair assembly 332 is placed in a forward-facing orientation. At step 948 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle rearward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 952 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated away from the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 . At step 956 , if the first seat assembly 332 is determined to be unoccupied and step 936 is performed, the first seat assembly 332 is moved by activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 The seat 204 is actuated to the deployed downward position. At step 960 , the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 may be actuated to the stowed-up position by activating the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 . Upon completion of the steps outlined above, in various examples, the passenger compartment 140 has transitioned from a social setting to a child care setting. As previously outlined, the user may be provided with a predetermined free time 964 upon entering the child care arrangement.
再次参考图32,在完成到儿童看护布置的转变和/或预定空闲时间964到期之后,控制器104可以在决策点968处提示用户是否将乘客舱返回到社交布置。如果用户选择不将乘客舱140的布置返回到社交布置,则可以在步骤972处退出所述过程,使得将不会再次提示用户退出社交布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,乘客舱140的用户可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果乘客舱140的用户选择退出儿童看护布置并在决策点968处返回到社交布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从儿童看护布置返回到社交布置。在这样的示例中,乘客舱140的用户在决策点968处选择返回到社交布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示976或请求信号。在从儿童看护布置返回到社交布置时,通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172在步骤980处将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在步骤982处,如果通过参考第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156确定第一座椅总成332未被占用,则可以将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。如果确定第一座椅总成332被占用,则可以省略步骤982。在步骤984中,通过激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184,在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤988处,可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,朝向第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤992处,可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,远离第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤996处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180,第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约一百八十度(180°)。在步骤1000处,如果执行步骤982,则可以通过激活座椅致动器172将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在完成上文针对从儿童看护布置返回到社交布置概述的步骤时,乘客舱140的布置已经成功地返回到社交布置。Referring again to FIG. 32 , after the transition to the childcare arrangement is completed and/or the scheduled idle time 964 expires, the controller 104 may prompt the user at decision point 968 whether to return the passenger compartment to the social arrangement. If the user chooses not to return the passenger compartment 140 arrangement to the social arrangement, the process may be exited at step 972 so that the user will not be prompted again to exit the social arrangement. In such an example, the user of passenger compartment 140 may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the user of the passenger compartment 140 elects to exit the childcare arrangement and return to the social arrangement at decision point 968, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return from the childcare arrangement to the social arrangement. In such an example, the user of passenger cabin 140 selecting to return to the social arrangement at decision point 968 may be considered a prompt 976 or request signal transmitted to controller 104 . Upon returning from the childcare arrangement to the socialization arrangement, the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated to the deployed-down position at step 980 by activating the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 . At step 982 , if the first seat assembly 332 is determined to be unoccupied by reference to the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated to retract upward. starting position. If it is determined that the first seat assembly 332 is occupied, step 982 may be omitted. In step 984 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 988 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated toward the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 992 , the seat 204 remote from the first seat assembly 332 may actuate the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 996, by activating the rotation actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332, the first seat assembly 332 is rotated approximately one hundred eighty degrees (180°) about its vertical axis 268. At step 1000 , if step 982 is performed, the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated to the deployed downward position by activating the seat actuator 172 . Upon completion of the steps outlined above for returning from a childcare arrangement to a social arrangement, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 has been successfully returned to the social arrangement.
参考图33,描绘了根据一个示例的从社交布置到儿童座椅布置的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,其是本示例中的社交布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是儿童座椅布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。响应于由控制器104传输的指令信号,如果基于从第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156接收的输入,第一座椅总成332未被占用,则通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172在步骤1004处将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。如果确定第一座椅总成332被占用,则可以省略步骤936。在步骤1008处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200朝向第一座椅总成332的座椅204旋转。在步骤1012处,由于激活第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180,第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约一百八十度(180°),使得第一座椅总成332置于面向前取向。在步骤1016处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184,在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤1020处,通过激活座椅靠背致动器168,可以远离第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤1024处,如果第一座椅总成332被确定为未被占用并且执行步骤1004,则通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172来将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在步骤1028处,通过激活第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180,第二座椅总成336被致动以使第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约九十度(90°)。在完成上文概述的步骤时,在各种示例中,乘客舱140已经从社交布置转变到儿童座椅布置。如先前所概述,在进入儿童座椅布置时,可以向用户提供预定空闲时间1032。Referring to Figure 33, a transition from a social arrangement to a child seat arrangement is depicted according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, which is the social arrangement in this example. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a child seat arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 400 transformation. In response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 , if the first seat assembly 332 is not occupied based on input received from the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 , then by activating the first seat assembly 332 The seat actuator 172 actuates the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 to the stowed upward position at step 1004 . If it is determined that the first seat assembly 332 is occupied, step 936 may be omitted. At step 1008 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is rotated toward the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 1012, as a result of activating the rotation actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332, the first seat assembly 332 rotates approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) about its vertical axis 268 such that the first seat assembly 332 rotates approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) about its vertical axis 268. The chair assembly 332 is placed in a forward-facing orientation. At step 1016 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated along the rail system 316 in a vehicle rearward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 1020 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated away from the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 . At step 1024 , if the first seat assembly 332 is determined to be unoccupied and step 1004 is performed, the first seat assembly 332 is moved by activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 The seat 204 is actuated to the deployed downward position. At step 1028 , by activating the rotation actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 , the second seat assembly 336 is actuated to rotate the second seat assembly 336 approximately ninety degrees about its vertical axis 268 degree (90°). Upon completing the steps outlined above, in various examples, the passenger compartment 140 has transitioned from a social arrangement to a child seat arrangement. As previously outlined, the user may be provided with a predetermined idle time 1032 upon entering the child seat arrangement.
再次参考图33,在完成到儿童座椅布置的转变和/或预定空闲时间1032到期之后,控制器104可以在决策点1036处提示用户是否将乘客舱140返回到社交布置。如果用户选择不将乘客舱140的布置返回到社交布置,则可以在步骤1040处退出所述过程,使得将不会再次提示用户退出儿童座椅布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,乘客舱140的用户可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果乘客舱140的用户选择退出儿童座椅布置并在决策点1036处返回到社交布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从儿童座椅布置返回到社交布置。在这样的示例中,乘客舱140的用户在决策点1036处选择返回到社交布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示1044或请求信号。在从儿童座椅布置返回到社交布置时,通过激活第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180在步骤1048处致动第二座椅总成336以围绕其竖直轴线268在逆时针方向上旋转约九十度(90°)。在步骤1050处,如果通过参考第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156确定第一座椅总成332未被占用,则可以将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。如果确定第一座椅总成332被占用,则可以省略步骤1050。在步骤1052中,通过激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184,在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤1056处,可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,朝向第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤1060处,可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,远离第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤1064处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180,第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约一百八十度(180°)。在步骤1068处,如果执行步骤1050,则可以通过激活座椅致动器172将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在完成上文针对从儿童座椅布置返回到社交布置概述的步骤时,乘客舱140的布置已经成功地返回到社交布置。Referring again to FIG. 33 , after completion of the transition to the child seat arrangement and/or expiration of the predetermined idle time 1032 , the controller 104 may prompt the user at decision point 1036 whether to return the passenger compartment 140 to the social arrangement. If the user chooses not to return the passenger compartment 140 arrangement to the social arrangement, the process may be exited at step 1040 so that the user will not be prompted again to exit the child seat arrangement. In such an example, the user of passenger compartment 140 may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the user of the passenger compartment 140 elects to exit the child seat arrangement and return to the social arrangement at decision point 1036, the process of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 will generally be reversed to return from the child seat arrangement to the social arrangement. In such an example, the user of passenger cabin 140 selecting to return to the social arrangement at decision point 1036 may be considered a prompt 1044 or request signal transmitted to controller 104 . Upon returning from the child seat arrangement to the social arrangement, the second seat assembly 336 is actuated at step 1048 to rotate counterclockwise about its vertical axis 268 by activating the rotational actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 Rotate approximately ninety degrees (90°) in direction. At step 1050 , if the first seat assembly 332 is determined to be unoccupied by reference to the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated to retract upward. starting position. If it is determined that the first seat assembly 332 is occupied, step 1050 may be omitted. In step 1052 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 1056 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated toward the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 1060 , the seat 204 remote from the first seat assembly 332 may actuate the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 1064, by activating the rotation actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332, the first seat assembly 332 is rotated approximately one hundred eighty degrees (180°) about its vertical axis 268. At step 1068 , if step 1050 is performed, the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated to the deployed downward position by activating the seat actuator 172 . Upon completion of the steps outlined above for returning from a child seat arrangement to a social arrangement, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 has been successfully returned to the social arrangement.
参考图34,描绘了根据一个示例的从社交布置到入口/出口布置的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,其是本示例中的社交布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是入口/出口布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。响应于由控制器104传输的指令信号,如果基于从第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156接收的输入,第一座椅总成332未被占用,则通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172在步骤1072处将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。如果确定第一座椅总成332被占用,则可以省略步骤1072。在步骤1076处,可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,朝向第一座椅总成332的座椅204旋转第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤1080处,由于激活第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180,第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约一百八十度(180°),使得第一座椅总成332置于面向前取向。任选地,如果第一座椅总成332将被占用或结合步骤1072确定为被占用,则可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184来在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤1084处,通过激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。如果第一座椅总成332在入口/出口布置中被占用或将被占用,则所述过程可以包括通过激活座椅靠背致动器168使第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200远离第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动。在各种示例中,如果第一座椅总成332被确定为未被占用并且执行步骤1072,则可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172来将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在步骤1088中,通过激活第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184,在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336。在步骤1092处,将第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200朝向第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动。在完成上文概述的步骤时,在各种示例中,乘客舱140已经从社交布置转变到入口/出口布置。如先前所概述,在进入入口/出口布置时,可以向用户提供预定空闲时间1096。Referring to Figure 34, depicted is a transition from a social arrangement to an entrance/exit arrangement according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, which is the social arrangement in this example. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is an inlet/outlet arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 400 transformation. In response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 , if the first seat assembly 332 is not occupied based on input received from the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 , then by activating the first seat assembly 332 The seat actuator 172 actuates the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 to the stowed-up position at step 1072 . If it is determined that the first seat assembly 332 is occupied, step 1072 may be omitted. At step 1076 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may be rotated toward the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 1080, as a result of activating the rotation actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332, the first seat assembly 332 rotates about its vertical axis 268 approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) such that the first seat assembly 332 rotates approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) about its vertical axis 268. The chair assembly 332 is placed in a forward-facing orientation. Optionally, if the first seat assembly 332 is to be occupied or is determined to be occupied in conjunction with step 1072 , the first seat assembly 332 may be moved along the rail in the vehicle rearward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 System 316 actuates first seat assembly 332 . At step 1084 , the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated to the stowed-up position by activating the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 . If the first seat assembly 332 is or will be occupied in an entry/exit arrangement, the process may include disengaging the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 The seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated. In various examples, if the first seat assembly 332 is determined to be unoccupied and step 1072 is performed, the first seat assembly 332 may be shifted into position by activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 . The seat 204 at 332 is actuated to the deployed downward position. In step 1088 , the second seat assembly 336 is actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 . At step 1092 , the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated toward the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 . Upon completing the steps outlined above, in various examples, the passenger cabin 140 has transitioned from a social arrangement to an entrance/exit arrangement. As previously outlined, the user may be provided with a predetermined idle time 1096 upon entering the entrance/exit arrangement.
再次参考图34,在完成到入口/出口布置的转变和/或预定空闲时间1096到期之后,控制器104可以在决策点1100处提示用户是否将乘客舱140返回到社交布置。如果用户选择不将乘客舱140的布置返回到社交布置,则可以在步骤1104处退出所述过程,使得将不会再次提示用户退出入口/出口布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,乘客舱140的用户可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果乘客舱140的用户选择退出入口/出口布置并在决策点1100处返回到社交布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从入口/出口布置返回到社交布置。在这样的示例中,乘客舱140的用户在决策点1100处选择返回到社交布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示1108或请求信号。在从入口/出口布置返回到社交布置时,通过激活第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184在步骤1112处在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336。在步骤1116处,通过激活座椅靠背致动器168,远离第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200。在步骤1120处,通过激活座椅致动器172将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在步骤1124处,通过激活座椅靠背致动器168,远离第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤1128处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180,第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约一百八十度(180°)以被置于面向后取向。在步骤1132处,如果通过结合步骤1072参考第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156确定第一座椅总成332未被占用,则可以将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。如果确定第一座椅总成332被占用,则可以省略步骤1132。在完成上文针对从入口/出口布置返回到社交布置概述的步骤时,乘客舱140的布置已经成功地返回到社交布置。Referring again to FIG. 34 , upon completion of the transition to the entrance/exit configuration and/or expiration of the predetermined idle time 1096 , the controller 104 may prompt the user at decision point 1100 whether to return the passenger compartment 140 to the social configuration. If the user chooses not to return the passenger compartment 140 arrangement to the social arrangement, the process may be exited at step 1104 so that the user will not be prompted again to exit the entrance/exit arrangement. In such an example, the user of passenger compartment 140 may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the user of passenger cabin 140 elects to exit the entrance/exit arrangement and return to the social arrangement at decision point 1100, the process of adjusting the arrangement of passenger cabin 140 will generally be reversed to return from the entrance/exit arrangement to the social arrangement. In such an example, the user of passenger cabin 140 selecting to return to the social arrangement at decision point 1100 may be considered a prompt 1108 or request signal transmitted to controller 104 . Upon returning from the entry/exit arrangement to the social arrangement, the second seat assembly 336 is actuated in the vehicle rearward direction along the rail system 316 at step 1112 by activating the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 . At step 1116 , the seat 204 remote from the second seat assembly 336 actuates the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 by activating the seat back actuator 168 . At step 1120 , the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 is actuated to the deployed downward position by activating the seat actuator 172 . At step 1124 , the seat 204 remote from the first seat assembly 332 actuates the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 . At step 1128 , by activating the rotation actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332 , the first seat assembly 332 is rotated approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) about its vertical axis 268 to be positioned facing Post-orientation. At step 1132 , if the first seat assembly 332 is determined to be unoccupied by referring to the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 in connection with step 1072 , the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated. to the extended downward position. If it is determined that the first seat assembly 332 is occupied, step 1132 may be omitted. Upon completion of the steps outlined above for returning from the entrance/exit arrangement to the social arrangement, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 has been successfully returned to the social arrangement.
参考图35,概述了根据一个示例的从社交布置到放松布置的转变。乘客舱140的布置最初处于第一布置392,其是本示例中的社交布置。在决定退出第一布置392时,用户(例如,通过用户界面120)将请求信号传送到控制器104,这可以构成将乘客舱140从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的提示396。在所描绘的示例中,第二布置400是放松布置。响应于请求信号或提示396,控制器104可以通过将指令信号传输到第一座椅总成332的各种致动器来发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变。响应于由控制器104传输的指令信号,如果基于从第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156接收的输入,第一座椅总成332未被占用,则通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172在步骤1136处将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。如果确定第一座椅总成332被占用,则可以省略步骤1136。在步骤1140处,可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168,朝向第一座椅总成332的座椅204旋转第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤1144处,由于激活第一座椅总成332的转动致动器180,第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约一百八十度(180°),使得第一座椅总成332置于面向前取向。在步骤1148处,通过激活第一座椅总成332的平移致动器184,在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤1152处,通过激活座椅靠背致动器168,远离第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在各种示例中,如果第一座椅总成332被确定为未被占用并且执行步骤1136,则可以通过激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172在步骤1156处将第一座椅总成332的座椅204朝向向下展开位置致动。在步骤1160处,通过激活小腿支撑件致动器176,将第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208从缩回位置朝向延伸位置致动。在完成前述步骤时,乘客舱140的布置已从社交布置转变到放松布置。如先前所概述,在进入放松布置时,可以向用户提供预定空闲时间1164。Referring to Figure 35, a transition from a social arrangement to a relaxing arrangement is outlined, according to one example. The arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is initially in a first arrangement 392, which is the social arrangement in this example. Upon deciding to exit the first arrangement 392 , the user (eg, via the user interface 120 ) transmits a request signal to the controller 104 , which may constitute a prompt 396 to transition the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the second arrangement 400 is a relaxed arrangement. In response to the request signal or prompt 396 , the controller 104 may initiate the transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 by transmitting command signals to various actuators of the first seat assembly 332 . In response to the command signal transmitted by the controller 104 , if the first seat assembly 332 is not occupied based on input received from the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 , then by activating the first seat assembly 332 The seat actuator 172 actuates the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 to the stowed-up position at step 1136 . If it is determined that the first seat assembly 332 is occupied, step 1136 may be omitted. At step 1140 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 may be rotated toward the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 1144, as a result of activating the rotation actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332, the first seat assembly 332 rotates about its vertical axis 268 approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) such that the first seat assembly 332 rotates approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) about its vertical axis 268. The chair assembly 332 is placed in a forward-facing orientation. At step 1148 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle rearward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 . At step 1152 , the seat 204 remote from the first seat assembly 332 actuates the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 . In various examples, if the first seat assembly 332 is determined to be unoccupied and step 1136 is performed, the first seat assembly 332 may be activated at step 1156 by activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 . The seat 204 of the seat assembly 332 is actuated toward the downwardly deployed position. At step 1160 , the calf support 208 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated from the retracted position toward the extended position by activating the calf support actuator 176 . Upon completion of the preceding steps, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 has been transitioned from a social arrangement to a relaxation arrangement. As previously outlined, the user may be provided with a predetermined idle time 1164 upon entering the relaxation arrangement.
再次参考图35,在完成到放松布置的转变和/或预定空闲时间1164到期之后,控制器104可以在决策点1168处提示用户是否将乘客舱140返回到社交布置。如果用户选择不将乘客舱140的布置返回到社交布置,则可以在步骤1172处退出所述过程,使得将不会再次提示用户退出放松布置。在这样的示例中,如果需要,乘客舱140的用户可以稍后与用户界面120交互以调整乘客舱140的布置。然而,如果乘客舱140的用户选择退出放松布置并在决策点1168处返回到社交布置,则调整乘客舱140的布置的过程通常将被颠倒以从放松布置返回到社交布置。在这样的示例中,乘客舱140的用户在决策点1168处选择返回到社交布置可以被视为传送到控制器104的提示1176或请求信号。在从放松布置返回到社交布置时,通过激活小腿支撑件致动器176在步骤1180处将第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208致动到缩回位置。在步骤1184处,如果已经通过第一座椅总成332的占用传感器156确定第一座椅总成332未被占用,则可以通过激活座椅致动器172来将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置。在步骤1188处,通过激活平移致动器184,在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第一座椅总成332。在步骤1192处,通过激活座椅靠背致动器168,朝向第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在步骤1196处,由于激活转动致动器180,第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转约一百八十度(180°),由此将第一座椅总成332置于面向后取向。在步骤1200处,如果执行步骤1184,则可以通过激活座椅致动器172将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在步骤1204处,通过激活座椅靠背致动器168,远离座椅204致动第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200。在完成上文针对从放松布置返回到社交布置概述的步骤时,乘客舱140的布置已经成功地返回到社交布置。Referring again to FIG. 35 , upon completion of the transition to the relaxed configuration and/or expiration of the predetermined idle time 1164 , the controller 104 may prompt the user at decision point 1168 whether to return the passenger cabin 140 to the social configuration. If the user chooses not to return the passenger compartment 140 arrangement to the social arrangement, the process may be exited at step 1172 so that the user will not be prompted again to exit the relaxed arrangement. In such an example, the user of passenger compartment 140 may later interact with user interface 120 to adjust the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 if desired. However, if the user of passenger cabin 140 elects to exit the relaxed arrangement and return to the social arrangement at decision point 1168, the process of adjusting the arrangement of passenger cabin 140 will generally be reversed to return from the relaxed arrangement to the social arrangement. In such an example, the user of passenger cabin 140 selecting to return to the social arrangement at decision point 1168 may be considered a prompt 1176 or request signal transmitted to controller 104 . Upon returning from the relaxed configuration to the social configuration, the calf support 208 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated to the retracted position at step 1180 by activating the calf support actuator 176 . At step 1184 , if it has been determined by the occupancy sensor 156 of the first seat assembly 332 that the first seat assembly 332 is not occupied, the first seat assembly 332 may be moved by activating the seat actuator 172 The seat 204 is actuated to the stowed upward position. At step 1188 , the first seat assembly 332 is actuated along the rail system 316 in the vehicle forward direction by activating the translation actuator 184 . At step 1192 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated toward the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 by activating the seat back actuator 168 . At step 1196, as a result of activating the rotation actuator 180, the first seat assembly 332 rotates approximately one hundred and eighty degrees (180°) about its vertical axis 268, thereby positioning the first seat assembly 332 Facing backward orientation. At step 1200 , if step 1184 is performed, the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 may be actuated to the deployed downward position by activating the seat actuator 172 . At step 1204 , the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 is actuated away from the seat 204 by activating the seat back actuator 168 . Upon completion of the steps outlined above for returning from a relaxed arrangement to a social arrangement, the arrangement of the passenger cabin 140 has been successfully returned to the social arrangement.
参考图36,描绘了根据一个示例的安全过程。安全过程具有起点1206。安全过程包括从内部源或外部源传送到控制器104的提示1208。如果提示1208的来源是外部源,则控制器104可以用于在决策点1212处确定外部源是否是授权用户。例如,控制器104可以参考存储器112以确定先前是否已经登记和/或验证了外部源(例如,先前通信地耦合到车辆100、控制器104可访问的数据库内的已验证用户,或以其他方式识别的外部源)。如果在决策点1212处确定外部源不是授权用户,则安全过程可以阻止外部源的访问并将外部源引导到结束点1216。在将外部源引导到结束点1216时,控制器104可以向外部源传送指示外部源未被识别为授权用户的人为干预提示1220。在这种示例中,与人为干预提示1220相关联的人为干预可以包括向外部源提供关于如何成为识别的外部源和/或授权用户的信息。在其中提示1208的来源是内部源(例如,车辆100上的人机界面)或者如在决策点1212处确定的,提示1208来自授权用户的示例中,可以在步骤1224处执行内部传感器验证协议。内部传感器验证协议可以包括参考座椅总成124中将被调整的一个座椅总成的占用传感器156、参考检测或感测座椅总成124的移动的障碍的移动授权传感器等等。在决策点1228处,由于在步骤1224处执行的内部传感器验证协议,安全过程可以确定与提示1208相关联的所请求的调整或移动的障碍的存在或不存在。如果内部传感器验证协议未检测到障碍,则控制器104可以在步骤1232处传输指令信号,其中所述指令信号对应于在提示1208处传送的所请求的调整或移动的执行。如果在步骤1224处执行的内部传感器验证协议期间检测到障碍,则控制器104可以将安全过程引导到结束点1216和/或人为干预提示1220。在其中检测到障碍的这种示例中,与人为干预提示1220相关联的人为干预可以包括向用户通知检测到的障碍并请求用户移除此类障碍以便完成所请求的调整或移动。Referring to Figure 36, a security process is depicted according to one example. The security process has a starting point 1206. The security process includes prompts 1208 transmitted to the controller 104 from an internal or external source. If the source of prompt 1208 is an external source, controller 104 may be used to determine at decision point 1212 whether the external source is an authorized user. For example, the controller 104 may reference the memory 112 to determine whether an external source has been previously registered and/or authenticated (e.g., an authenticated user previously communicatively coupled to the vehicle 100 , within a database accessible to the controller 104 , or otherwise. identified external source). If it is determined at decision point 1212 that the external source is not an authorized user, the security process may block access by the external source and direct the external source to end point 1216 . In directing the external source to the end point 1216, the controller 104 may transmit a human intervention prompt 1220 to the external source indicating that the external source is not identified as an authorized user. In such an example, human intervention associated with human intervention prompt 1220 may include providing information to an external source regarding how to become an identified external source and/or authorized user. In examples where the source of prompt 1208 is an internal source (eg, a human-machine interface on vehicle 100) or, as determined at decision point 1212, prompt 1208 comes from an authorized user, an internal sensor verification protocol may be performed at step 1224. The internal sensor verification protocol may include an occupancy sensor 156 that references one of the seat assemblies 124 that is to be adjusted, a movement authorization sensor that references an obstacle to detecting or sensing movement of the seat assembly 124 , and so on. At decision point 1228 , the safety process may determine the presence or absence of the requested adjustment or movement of the barrier associated with prompt 1208 as a result of the internal sensor verification protocol performed at step 1224 . If the internal sensor verification protocol detects no obstruction, the controller 104 may transmit an instruction signal at step 1232 , wherein the instruction signal corresponds to performance of the requested adjustment or movement transmitted at prompt 1208 . If an obstruction is detected during the internal sensor verification protocol performed at step 1224 , the controller 104 may direct the safety process to an end point 1216 and/or a human intervention prompt 1220 . In such examples where an impediment is detected, the human intervention associated with the human intervention prompt 1220 may include notifying the user of the detected impediment and requesting that the user remove such impediment in order to complete the requested adjustment or movement.
再次参考图36,决策点1212可以被称为认证步骤。在所描绘的示例中,当从外部源接收到提示1208时,发生在决策点1212处执行的认证。然而,本公开不限于此。相反,在不脱离本文公开的概念的情况下,可以针对车辆100的内部源或车载源执行在决策点1212处执行的认证。例如,在车辆100上并且可以用于在向控制器104传输请求信号之前和/或在传输来自控制器104的指令信号之前认证用户的硬件可以包括但不限于成像器132、相机、传声器和/或各种传感器。可以设想,在确定用户是授权用户时,可以采用面部识别、语音识别、手势即密码和/或电话即钥匙方法。手势即密码可以包括可以经由成像器132、相机、触敏传感器和/或另一合适的传感器识别的用户确立的手势。在确定给定用户是否被授权在给定时间访问车辆100时,可以对照一个或多个授权用户的存储手势来参考所识别的手势。电话即钥匙可以包括控制器104将用户的给定个人移动装置识别为授权用户的个人移动装置。例如,授权用户可能已经通过以可由控制器104识别的方式登记个人移动装置(例如,通过使用存储在其上的软件应用程序、通过使用个人移动装置的唯一识别信息等)将个人移动装置确立为属于授权用户。Referring again to Figure 36, decision point 1212 may be referred to as the authentication step. In the depicted example, authentication performed at decision point 1212 occurs when prompt 1208 is received from an external source. However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto. Rather, the authentication performed at decision point 1212 may be performed against a source internal to the vehicle 100 or an onboard source without departing from the concepts disclosed herein. For example, hardware on the vehicle 100 that may be used to authenticate a user prior to transmitting a request signal to the controller 104 and/or prior to transmitting an instruction signal from the controller 104 may include, but is not limited to, imager 132 , cameras, microphones, and/or or various sensors. It is envisioned that facial recognition, voice recognition, gesture-as-password, and/or phone-as-key methods may be employed in determining that a user is an authorized user. Gesture-as-passwords may include user-established gestures that may be recognized via imager 132, a camera, a touch-sensitive sensor, and/or another suitable sensor. In determining whether a given user is authorized to access vehicle 100 at a given time, the recognized gesture may be referenced against stored gestures of one or more authorized users. The phone-as-key may include the controller 104 identifying the user's given personal mobile device as the authorized user's personal mobile device. For example, the authorized user may have established the personal mobile device as such by registering the personal mobile device in a manner identifiable by controller 104 (e.g., by using a software application stored thereon, by using the personal mobile device's unique identification information, etc.) Belong to authorized users.
参考图37,调整车辆100的乘客舱140的布置的方法1220包括步骤1224:从用户界面120接收将车辆100的乘客舱140的布置从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的请求。方法1220还包括步骤1228:在发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变之前利用占用传感器156确定座椅总成124的占用状态。座椅总成124包括座椅204和座椅靠背200。方法1220还包括步骤1232:利用导轨传感器136检测座椅总成124在车辆100的乘客舱140内沿着导轨系统316的当前导轨位置。另外,方法1220包括步骤1236:将座椅总成124沿着导轨系统316的当前导轨位置与座椅总成124沿着导轨系统316的期望导轨位置进行比较并确定导轨位置差。此外,方法1220包括步骤1240,其中响应于导轨位置差,座椅总成124的平移致动器184由控制器104激活以将座椅总成124与期望导轨位置对准。方法1220还包括步骤1244:利用座椅位置传感器280检测座椅总成124的座椅204的当前座椅位置。方法1220还包括步骤1248:将当前座椅位置与期望座椅位置进行比较并确定座椅位置差。此外,方法1220包括步骤1252,其中响应于座椅位置差,座椅总成124的座椅致动器172由控制器104激活以将座椅204与期望座椅位置对准。此外,方法1220还包括步骤1256:利用座椅靠背位置传感器276检测座椅总成124的座椅靠背200的当前座椅靠背位置。方法1220还包括步骤1260:将当前座椅靠背位置与期望座椅靠背位置进行比较并确定座椅靠背位置差。方法1220还包括步骤1264,其中响应于座椅靠背位置差,座椅总成124的座椅靠背致动器168由控制器104激活以将座椅靠背200与期望座椅靠背位置对准。Referring to FIG. 37 , a method 1220 of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 includes step 1224 of receiving a request from the user interface 120 to transition the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . The method 1220 also includes the step 1228 of utilizing the occupancy sensor 156 to determine the occupancy status of the seat assembly 124 before initiating the transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . Seat assembly 124 includes seat 204 and seat back 200 . Method 1220 also includes step 1232 of utilizing rail sensor 136 to detect a current rail position of seat assembly 124 along rail system 316 within passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 . Additionally, method 1220 includes step 1236 of comparing the current rail position of the seat assembly 124 along the rail system 316 to the desired rail position of the seat assembly 124 along the rail system 316 and determining the rail position difference. Additionally, method 1220 includes step 1240 wherein in response to the rail position difference, the translation actuator 184 of the seat assembly 124 is activated by the controller 104 to align the seat assembly 124 with the desired rail position. The method 1220 also includes step 1244 of detecting the current seat position of the seat 204 of the seat assembly 124 using the seat position sensor 280 . Method 1220 also includes step 1248 of comparing the current seat position with the desired seat position and determining the seat position difference. Additionally, method 1220 includes step 1252 wherein in response to the seat position difference, seat actuator 172 of seat assembly 124 is activated by controller 104 to align seat 204 with a desired seat position. In addition, the method 1220 also includes step 1256 of using the seat back position sensor 276 to detect the current seat back position of the seat back 200 of the seat assembly 124 . Method 1220 also includes step 1260 of comparing the current seat back position to the desired seat back position and determining the seat back position difference. The method 1220 also includes step 1264 in which the seat back actuator 168 of the seat assembly 124 is activated by the controller 104 to align the seat back 200 with the desired seat back position in response to the seat back position difference.
再次参考图37,在各种示例中,座椅总成124可以设置有小腿支撑件208。因此,方法1220可以包括利用小腿支撑件位置传感器404检测座椅总成124的小腿支撑件208的当前小腿支撑件位置。另外,在这样的示例中,方法1220可以包括将当前小腿支撑件位置与期望的小腿支撑件位置进行比较并确定小腿支撑件位置差。此外,在这样的示例中,方法1220可以包括响应于小腿支撑件位置差,激活小腿支撑件致动器176以将小腿支撑件208与期望的小腿支撑件位置对准。在一些示例中,方法1220可以包括利用转动位置传感器284检测座椅总成124的转动总成260的当前转动位置。另外,在这样的示例中,方法1220可以包括将当前转动位置与期望转动位置进行比较并确定转动位置差。此外,在这样的示例中,方法1220可以包括响应于转动位置差,激活转动致动器180以将转动总成260与期望转动位置对准。用户界面120的示例可以包括但不限于移动电子装置、具有朝向车辆100的乘客舱140取向的视野的成像器132、具有朝向车辆外部环境取向的视野的成像器132、定位在车辆100的乘客舱140内的传声器、定位在车辆100外部的传声器、设置在用户的个人电子装置上的传声器等等。在各种示例中,方法1220可以包括利用座椅总成124的占用传感器156检测车辆100的乘客舱140的占用状态。另外,在这样的示例中,方法1220可以包括在将乘客舱的布置从第一布置392转变到第二布置400之前确定乘客舱140没有乘员。在一些示例中,乘客舱140从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变在车辆100处于运动中时(例如,在被占用时在前往目的地的途中,在未被占用时前往接载位置的途中等)完成。在各种示例中,第一布置392可以是由第一用户传送到控制器104的乘客舱140的优选布置,而第二布置400是由第二用户传送到控制器104的乘客舱140的优选布置。在这样的示例中,第一用户可能已经停止他们对车辆100的使用,并且车辆100正在运动到第二用户的位置。在一些示例中,当控制器104从用户界面120接收到将车辆100的乘客舱140的布置从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的请求时,控制器104可以接收关于预期进入乘客舱的乘员的数量和所述数量的乘员的预期地理目的地的数据,其中所述数据决定对第二布置400的选择。例如,控制器104可以具有存储在存储器112中的数据,所述数据与商业地址、在选择给定目的地时利用的先前布置、在运输给定数量的乘员时利用的先前布置等等有关。因此,控制器104可能能够基于存储在存储器112内的数据来选择期望布置。Referring again to FIG. 37 , in various examples, the seat assembly 124 may be provided with calf supports 208 . Accordingly, method 1220 may include detecting a current calf support position of calf support 208 of seat assembly 124 using calf support position sensor 404 . Additionally, in such examples, method 1220 may include comparing the current calf support position to the desired calf support position and determining the calf support position difference. Additionally, in such examples, method 1220 may include activating calf support actuator 176 to align calf support 208 with the desired calf support position in response to the calf support position difference. In some examples, method 1220 may include detecting a current rotational position of rotational assembly 260 of seat assembly 124 using rotational position sensor 284 . Additionally, in such examples, method 1220 may include comparing the current rotational position to the desired rotational position and determining the rotational position difference. Additionally, in such examples, method 1220 may include activating rotational actuator 180 to align rotational assembly 260 with a desired rotational position in response to the rotational position difference. Examples of the user interface 120 may include, but are not limited to, a mobile electronic device, an imager 132 having a field of view oriented toward the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 , an imager 132 having a field of view oriented toward the environment external to the vehicle, a device positioned in the passenger compartment of the vehicle 100 A microphone within 140 , a microphone positioned outside the vehicle 100 , a microphone disposed on the user's personal electronic device, and so on. In various examples, method 1220 may include detecting an occupancy status of passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 using occupancy sensor 156 of seat assembly 124 . Additionally, in such examples, method 1220 may include determining that passenger compartment 140 is free of occupants before transitioning the arrangement of the passenger compartment from first arrangement 392 to second arrangement 400 . In some examples, the passenger compartment 140 transitions from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 while the vehicle 100 is in motion (e.g., en route to a destination when occupied, en route to a pickup location when unoccupied) on the way) is completed. In various examples, the first arrangement 392 may be a preferred arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 communicated to the controller 104 by a first user, while the second arrangement 400 is a preferred arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 communicated to the controller 104 by a second user. layout. In such an example, the first user may have ceased their use of vehicle 100 and vehicle 100 is moving to the second user's location. In some examples, when the controller 104 receives a request from the user interface 120 to transition the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 , the controller 104 may receive information regarding the intended entry into the passenger compartment. Data on the number of occupants and the intended geographical destination of said number of occupants, wherein said data determines the selection of the second arrangement 400 . For example, the controller 104 may have data stored in the memory 112 related to business addresses, previous arrangements utilized when selecting a given destination, prior arrangements utilized when transporting a given number of occupants, and so forth. Accordingly, controller 104 may be able to select a desired arrangement based on data stored within memory 112 .
参考图38,调整车辆100的乘客舱140布置的方法1272包括步骤1276:向车辆100提供第一座椅总成332、第二座椅总成336和将乘客舱140与车辆外部环境分开的多个通道门312。第二座椅总成336定位在第一座椅总成332的后方。第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336各自包括限定其座椅表面350的座椅204和座椅靠背200。方法1272还包括步骤1280:从用户界面120接收将车辆100的乘客舱140的布置从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的请求。在各种示例中,第二布置400可以是儿童座椅布置。方法1272还包括步骤1284:在发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变之前利用第二座椅总成336的占用传感器156确定第二座椅总成336是否未被占用。另外,方法1272包括步骤1288:利用转动位置传感器284检测第二座椅总成336的当前转动位置。此外,方法1272还包括步骤1292:将第二座椅总成336的当前转动位置与期望转动位置进行比较并确定转动位置差。方法1272还包括步骤1296,其中响应于转动位置差,第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180由控制器104激活以将第二座椅总成336与期望转动位置对准。在各种示例中,期望转动位置将第二座椅总成336的座椅表面350朝向多个通道门312中的一个紧邻通道门取向。方法1272还包括步骤1300:利用座椅位置传感器280检测第二座椅总成336的座椅204的当前座椅位置。另外,方法1272包括步骤1304:将第二座椅总成336的当前座椅位置与期望座椅位置进行比较并确定座椅位置差。此外,方法1272包括步骤1308,其中响应于座椅位置差,第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172由控制器104激活以将第二座椅总成336的座椅204与期望座椅位置对准。Referring to FIG. 38 , a method 1272 of adjusting the layout of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 includes the step 1276 of providing the vehicle 100 with a first seat assembly 332 , a second seat assembly 336 , and a plurality of components that separate the passenger compartment 140 from the vehicle's external environment. A passage door 312. The second seat assembly 336 is positioned behind the first seat assembly 332 . The first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 each include a seat 204 and a seat back 200 defining a seating surface 350 thereof. Method 1272 also includes step 1280 of receiving a request from user interface 120 to transition the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 from first arrangement 392 to second arrangement 400 . In various examples, the second arrangement 400 may be a child seat arrangement. Method 1272 also includes step 1284 of utilizing the occupancy sensor 156 of the second seat assembly 336 to determine whether the second seat assembly 336 is unoccupied before initiating the transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . Additionally, method 1272 includes step 1288 of detecting the current rotational position of the second seat assembly 336 using the rotational position sensor 284 . In addition, method 1272 also includes step 1292 of comparing the current rotational position of the second seat assembly 336 with the desired rotational position and determining the rotational position difference. Method 1272 also includes step 1296 wherein in response to the rotational position difference, the rotational actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 is activated by the controller 104 to align the second seat assembly 336 with the desired rotational position. In various examples, the desired rotational position orients the seat surface 350 of the second seat assembly 336 toward one of the plurality of access doors 312 proximate the access door. Method 1272 also includes step 1300 of detecting the current seat position of the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 using the seat position sensor 280 . Additionally, method 1272 includes step 1304 of comparing the current seat position of the second seat assembly 336 to the desired seat position and determining the seat position difference. Additionally, method 1272 includes step 1308 , wherein in response to the seat position difference, the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 is activated by the controller 104 to align the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 with the desired position. Seat position alignment.
再次参考图38,第二座椅总成336的座椅表面350朝向多个通道门312中的一个紧邻通道门取向可以将第二座椅总成336的座椅表面350定位成平行于车辆100的横向轴线1310(参见图6)并从车辆100的纵向轴线或纵向方向328成角度地偏移。在各种示例中,方法1272可以包括通过约九十度(90°)的旋转来致动第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180以到达期望转动位置。在这样的示例中,第一布置392可以是其中第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336各自以面向前取向布置的设计布置。方法1272还可以包括向第二座椅总成336提供联接到第二座椅总成336的座椅表面350的辅助座椅总成500。辅助座椅总成500可以小于第二座椅总成336,其中辅助座椅总成500被配置为比第二座椅总成336接收身材更小的乘员。方法1272还可以包括提供在乘客舱140的地板320内并沿着车辆100的纵向方向328延伸的导轨系统316。在一些示例中,方法1272可以包括向第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336中的每一者提供联接到座椅底座228并与导轨系统316接合的平移致动器184。在各种示例中,方法1272可以包括激活第二座椅总成336的平移致动器184以在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336以将第二座椅总成336定位在期望导轨位置处。在一些示例中,第二座椅总成336的期望座椅位置可以是座椅204的向下展开位置。在各种示例中,第一布置392是货物布置,其中货物布置可以被限定为第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336的座椅204被置于向上收起位置,以及第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336沿着导轨系统316朝向乘客舱140的前部区域300致动。在一些示例中,第一布置392是入口/出口布置,其中第二座椅总成的座椅204被置于向上收起位置,并且第二座椅总成336沿着导轨系统316朝向乘客舱140的前部区域300致动。在各种示例中,第一布置336可以是由第一用户传送到控制器104的乘客舱140的优选布置,并且第二布置400可以是由第二用户传送到控制器104的乘客舱140的优选布置。在这样的示例中,第一用户已经停止使用车辆100,并且车辆100可以正在运动到第二用户的位置。Referring again to FIG. 38 , orienting the seat surface 350 of the second seat assembly 336 toward one of the plurality of access doors 312 proximate the access door may position the seat surface 350 of the second seat assembly 336 parallel to the vehicle 100 lateral axis 1310 (see FIG. 6 ) and is angularly offset from the longitudinal axis or longitudinal direction 328 of the vehicle 100 . In various examples, method 1272 may include actuating rotation actuator 180 of second seat assembly 336 through a rotation of approximately ninety degrees (90°) to a desired rotational position. In such an example, first arrangement 392 may be a design arrangement in which first seat assembly 332 and second seat assembly 336 are each arranged in a forward-facing orientation. The method 1272 may also include providing the second seat assembly 336 with the auxiliary seat assembly 500 coupled to the seating surface 350 of the second seat assembly 336 . The booster seat assembly 500 may be smaller than the second seat assembly 336 , where the booster seat assembly 500 is configured to receive a smaller occupant than the second seat assembly 336 . The method 1272 may also include providing a rail system 316 within the floor 320 of the passenger compartment 140 and extending along the longitudinal direction 328 of the vehicle 100 . In some examples, method 1272 may include providing each of first seat assembly 332 and second seat assembly 336 with a translation actuator 184 coupled to seat base 228 and engaged with rail system 316 . In various examples, method 1272 may include activating the translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 to actuate the second seat assembly 336 along the rail system 316 in a vehicle rearward direction to move the second seat The assembly 336 is positioned at the desired rail location. In some examples, the desired seating position of the second seat assembly 336 may be a deployed-down position of the seat 204 . In various examples, the first arrangement 392 is a cargo arrangement, wherein the cargo arrangement may be defined as the seats 204 of the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 being placed in the stowed-up position, and the One seat assembly 332 and a second seat assembly 336 are actuated along the rail system 316 toward the forward region 300 of the passenger compartment 140 . In some examples, the first arrangement 392 is an entry/exit arrangement in which the seat 204 of the second seat assembly is placed in the stowed-up position and the second seat assembly 336 faces the passenger compartment along the rail system 316 The front area 300 of 140 is actuated. In various examples, the first arrangement 336 may be a preferred arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 communicated to the controller 104 by a first user, and the second arrangement 400 may be a preferred arrangement communicated to the passenger compartment 140 of the controller 104 by a second user. Preferred arrangement. In such an example, the first user has stopped using vehicle 100 and vehicle 100 may be moving to the second user's location.
参考图39,调整车辆100的乘客舱140布置的方法1312包括步骤1316:向车辆100提供第一座椅总成332、第二座椅总成336和多个通道门312。第二座椅总成336定位在第一座椅总成332的后方。第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336各自包括限定被配置为接收乘员的座椅表面350的座椅204和座椅靠背200。通道门312将乘客舱140与车辆外部环境分开。方法1312还包括步骤1320:从用户界面120接收将车辆100的乘客舱140的布置从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的请求。在所描绘的示例中,第一布置392可以是儿童座椅布置。儿童座椅布置可以被限定为第二座椅总成336旋转使得其座椅表面350朝向多个通道门312中的一个紧邻通道门取向。方法1312还包括步骤1324:利用第一导轨传感器136检测第一座椅总成332在车辆100的乘客舱140内沿着导轨系统316的第一当前导轨位置。另外,方法1312包括步骤1328:将第一座椅总成332的第一当前导轨位置与第一期望导轨位置进行比较并确定第一导轨位置差。此外,方法1312包括步骤1332,其中响应于第一导轨位置差,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的第一平移致动器184以将第一座椅总成332与第一期望导轨位置对准。方法1312还包括步骤1336:利用第一座椅位置传感器280检测第一座椅总成332的第一当前座椅位置。方法1312还包括步骤1340:将第一座椅总成332的第一当前座椅位置与第一期望座椅位置进行比较并确定第一座椅位置差。另外,方法1312包括步骤1344,其中响应于第一座椅位置差,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的第一座椅致动器172以将第一座椅总成332的座椅204与第一期望座椅位置对准。此外,方法1312还包括步骤1348:利用第一转动位置传感器284检测第一座椅总成332的第一当前转动位置。方法1312还包括步骤1352:将第一当前转动位置与第一期望转动位置进行比较并确定第一转动位置差。方法1312还包括步骤1356,其中响应于第一转动位置差,控制器104激活第一转动致动器180以将第一座椅总成332与第一期望转动位置对准。另外,方法1312包括步骤1360:激活第二座椅总成336的第二转动致动器180使得第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268旋转。Referring to FIG. 39 , a method 1312 of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 includes the step 1316 of providing the vehicle 100 with a first seat assembly 332 , a second seat assembly 336 and a plurality of access doors 312 . The second seat assembly 336 is positioned behind the first seat assembly 332 . The first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 each include a seat 204 and a seat back 200 defining a seating surface 350 configured to receive an occupant. Access door 312 separates passenger compartment 140 from the vehicle exterior environment. Method 1312 further includes step 1320 of receiving a request from user interface 120 to transition the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 from first arrangement 392 to second arrangement 400 . In the depicted example, the first arrangement 392 may be a child seat arrangement. The child seat arrangement may be defined with the second seat assembly 336 rotated such that its seating surface 350 is oriented toward one of the plurality of access doors 312 proximate the access door. Method 1312 also includes step 1324 of detecting a first current rail position of first seat assembly 332 along rail system 316 within passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 using first rail sensor 136 . Additionally, method 1312 includes step 1328 of comparing a first current rail position of the first seat assembly 332 to a first desired rail position and determining a first rail position difference. Additionally, method 1312 includes step 1332 , wherein in response to the first rail position difference, controller 104 activates first translation actuator 184 of first seat assembly 332 to align first seat assembly 332 with the first desired rail. Position alignment. Method 1312 also includes step 1336 of detecting a first current seat position of first seat assembly 332 using first seat position sensor 280 . Method 1312 also includes step 1340 of comparing a first current seat position of the first seat assembly 332 to a first desired seat position and determining a first seat position difference. Additionally, method 1312 includes step 1344 , wherein in response to the first seat position difference, controller 104 activates first seat actuator 172 of first seat assembly 332 to move the seat of first seat assembly 332 204 is aligned with the first desired seat position. In addition, the method 1312 also includes step 1348 of using the first rotational position sensor 284 to detect the first current rotational position of the first seat assembly 332 . Method 1312 also includes step 1352 of comparing the first current rotational position with the first desired rotational position and determining a first rotational position difference. Method 1312 also includes step 1356, wherein in response to the first rotational position difference, controller 104 activates first rotational actuator 180 to align first seat assembly 332 with the first desired rotational position. Additionally, method 1312 includes step 1360 of activating the second rotation actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 to cause the second seat assembly 336 to rotate about its vertical axis 268 .
再次参考图39,激活第二座椅总成336的第二转动致动器180使得第二座椅总成336围绕其竖直轴线268旋转的步骤1360可以将第二座椅总成336定位于面向前取向。在一些示例中,激活第一转动致动器180以将第一座椅总成332与第一期望转动位置对准的步骤1356可以将第一座椅总成332定位于面向后取向。在各种示例中,激活第一转动致动器180以将第一座椅总成332与第一期望转动位置对准的步骤1356可以将第一座椅总成332定位于面向前取向。方法1312可以包括利用第二导轨传感器136检测第二座椅总成336在车辆100的乘客舱内沿着导轨系统316的第二当前导轨位置。在这样的示例中,方法1312还可以包括将第二座椅总成336的第二当前导轨位置与第二期望导轨位置进行比较并确定第二导轨位置差。在此类示例中,方法1312还可以包括响应于第二导轨位置差,激活第二座椅总成336的第二平移致动器180以将第二座椅总成336与第二期望导轨位置对准。方法1312还可以包括利用第二座椅位置传感器280检测第二座椅总成336的第二当前座椅位置。在这样的示例中,方法1312还可以包括将第二座椅总成336的第二当前座椅位置与第二期望座椅位置进行比较并确定第二座椅位置差。另外,在这样的示例中,方法1312还可以包括响应于第二座椅位置差,激活第二座椅总成336的第二座椅致动器172以将第二座椅总成的座椅与期望座椅位置对准。激活第二座椅总成336的第二座椅致动器172以将第二座椅总成336的座椅204与第二期望座椅位置对准的步骤可以将第二座椅总成336的座椅204定位于向上收起位置。激活第一座椅总成332的第一座椅致动器172以将第一座椅总成的座椅204与第一期望座椅位置对准的步骤可以将第一座椅总成332的座椅204定位于向上收起位置。激活第一座椅总成332的第一平移致动器184以将第一座椅总成332与第一期望导轨位置对准的步骤可以将第一座椅总成332靠近导轨系统316的最前方定位在乘客舱140的前部区域300内。激活第二座椅总成336的第二平移致动器184以将第二座椅总成336与第二期望导轨位置对准的步骤可以将第二座椅总成336定位在乘客舱140的前部区域300中。Referring again to FIG. 39 , the step 1360 of activating the second rotation actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 to rotate the second seat assembly 336 about its vertical axis 268 may position the second seat assembly 336 at Facing forward orientation. In some examples, activating the first rotational actuator 180 to align the first seat assembly 332 with the first desired rotational position 1356 may position the first seat assembly 332 in a rearward-facing orientation. In various examples, activating the first rotational actuator 180 to align the first seat assembly 332 with the first desired rotational position 1356 may position the first seat assembly 332 in a forward-facing orientation. Method 1312 may include utilizing second rail sensor 136 to detect a second current rail position of second seat assembly 336 along rail system 316 within the passenger compartment of vehicle 100 . In such an example, method 1312 may further include comparing a second current rail position of the second seat assembly 336 to a second desired rail position and determining a second rail position difference. In such examples, the method 1312 may further include activating the second translation actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 to align the second seat assembly 336 with the second desired rail position in response to the second rail position difference. alignment. Method 1312 may also include detecting a second current seat position of the second seat assembly 336 using the second seat position sensor 280 . In such an example, method 1312 may further include comparing a second current seat position of the second seat assembly 336 to a second desired seat position and determining a second seat position difference. Additionally, in such examples, method 1312 may further include activating the second seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 to move the seat of the second seat assembly 336 in response to the second seat position difference. Align with desired seat position. The step of activating the second seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 to align the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 with the second desired seat position may move the second seat assembly 336 The seat 204 is positioned in the stowed upward position. The step of activating the first seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the seat 204 of the first seat assembly with the first desired seat position may move the first seat assembly 332 Seat 204 is positioned in the stowed-up position. The step of activating the first translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the first seat assembly 332 with the first desired rail position may move the first seat assembly 332 closer to the extreme end of the rail system 316 The front is positioned within the forward area 300 of the passenger compartment 140 . The step of activating the second translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 to align the second seat assembly 336 with the second desired rail position may position the second seat assembly 336 in the passenger compartment 140 in the front area 300.
参考图40,调整车辆100的乘客舱140布置的方法1364包括步骤1368:向车辆100提供第一座椅总成332、第二座椅总成336、第三座椅总成340和通道门312。第二座椅总成336定位在第一座椅总成332的后方。第三座椅总成340定位在第一座椅总成332的后方并与第二座椅总成336横向相邻。第一座椅总成332、第二座椅总成336和第三座椅总成340各自包括限定其座椅表面350的座椅204和座椅靠背204。通道门312将乘客舱140与车辆外部环境分开。方法1364还可以包括步骤1372:从用户界面120接收将车辆100的乘客舱140的布置从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的请求。第二布置400可以是儿童看护布置。方法1364还可以包括步骤1376:在发起从第一布置392到第二布置400的转变之前利用第二座椅总成336的占用传感器156确定第二座椅总成336是否未被占用。另外,方法1364还包括步骤1380:利用第一座椅位置传感器280检测第一座椅总成332的座椅204的第一当前座椅位置。此外,方法1364还包括步骤1384:将第一座椅总成332的第一当前座椅位置与第一期望座椅位置进行比较并确定第一座椅位置差。方法1364还包括步骤1388:利用第二座椅位置传感器280检测第二座椅总成336的座椅204的第二当前座椅位置。方法1364还包括步骤1392:将第二座椅总成336的第二当前座椅位置与第二期望座椅位置进行比较并确定第二座椅位置差。另外,方法1364包括步骤1396,其中响应于第二座椅位置差,控制器104激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172以将第二座椅总成336的座椅204与第二期望座椅位置对准。第二期望座椅位置可以是第二座椅总成336的座椅204的向上收起位置。此外,方法1364还包括步骤1400:利用第一导轨传感器136检测第一座椅总成332在车辆100的乘客舱140内沿着导轨系统316的第一当前导轨位置。方法1364还包括步骤1404:将第一座椅总成336的第一当前导轨位置与第一期望导轨位置进行比较并确定第一导轨位置差。方法1364还包括步骤1408,其中响应于第一导轨位置差,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的第一平移致动器184以将第一座椅总成332与第一期望导轨位置对准。将第一座椅总成332置于第一期望导轨位置可能导致第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336两者都定位在乘客舱140的中心区域304中。Referring to FIG. 40 , a method 1364 of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 includes the step 1368 of providing the vehicle 100 with a first seat assembly 332 , a second seat assembly 336 , a third seat assembly 340 and an access door 312 . The second seat assembly 336 is positioned behind the first seat assembly 332 . The third seat assembly 340 is positioned rearward of the first seat assembly 332 and laterally adjacent the second seat assembly 336 . The first, second, and third seat assemblies 332 , 336 , and 340 each include a seat 204 and a seat back 204 that define a seating surface 350 thereof. Access door 312 separates passenger compartment 140 from the vehicle exterior environment. Method 1364 may also include step 1372 of receiving a request from user interface 120 to transition the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 from first arrangement 392 to second arrangement 400 . The second arrangement 400 may be a childcare arrangement. Method 1364 may also include step 1376 of utilizing the occupancy sensor 156 of the second seat assembly 336 to determine whether the second seat assembly 336 is unoccupied before initiating the transition from the first arrangement 392 to the second arrangement 400 . In addition, method 1364 also includes step 1380 of using the first seat position sensor 280 to detect the first current seat position of the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 . Additionally, method 1364 also includes step 1384 of comparing the first current seat position of the first seat assembly 332 to the first desired seat position and determining a first seat position difference. Method 1364 also includes step 1388 of detecting a second current seat position of the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 using the second seat position sensor 280 . Method 1364 also includes step 1392 of comparing a second current seat position of the second seat assembly 336 to a second desired seat position and determining a second seat position difference. Additionally, method 1364 includes step 1396 , wherein in response to the second seat position difference, the controller 104 activates the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 to align the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 with the second seat position difference. Second desired seat position alignment. The second desired seating position may be the stowed-up position of the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 . Additionally, method 1364 further includes step 1400 of utilizing first rail sensor 136 to detect a first current rail position of first seat assembly 332 along rail system 316 within passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 . Method 1364 also includes step 1404 of comparing a first current rail position of the first seat assembly 336 to a first desired rail position and determining a first rail position difference. Method 1364 also includes step 1408 , wherein in response to the first rail position difference, the controller 104 activates the first translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the first seat assembly 332 with the first desired rail position. alignment. Positioning the first seat assembly 332 in the first desired rail position may result in both the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 being positioned in the central region 304 of the passenger compartment 140 .
再次参考图40,第一座椅总成332的第一期望导轨位置可能导致第一座椅总成332与第二座椅总成336之间的距离减小。另外,第一座椅总成332的第一期望导轨位置可能导致第一座椅总成332与第三座椅总成340之间的距离减小。在各种示例中,方法1364可以包括激活第一座椅总成332的转动致动器,使得第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268朝向第三座椅总成340旋转。在一些示例中,方法1364可以包括激活第二座椅总成336的第二平移致动器184以在车辆向后方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336以将第二座椅总成336定位在第二期望导轨位置处。在各种示例中,第二座椅总成336的第二期望座椅位置可以是座椅204的向上收起位置。在各种示例中,第一布置是入口/出口布置。方法1364还包括响应于第一座椅位置差,激活第一座椅总成332的第一座椅致动器172以将第一座椅总成332的座椅204与第一期望座椅位置对准。在一些示例中,第一期望座椅位置是第一座椅总成332的座椅204的向下展开位置。在各种示例中,第一布置392可以是货物布置。在一些示例中,第一布置392是设计布置。在各种示例中,方法1364包括利用座椅靠背位置传感器276检测第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200的当前座椅靠背位置。在这样的示例中,方法1364还可以包括将第一座椅总成的当前座椅位置与第一期望座椅靠背位置进行比较并确定座椅靠背位置差。另外,在这样的示例中,方法1364可以包括响应于座椅靠背位置差,激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168以将第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200与期望座椅靠背位置对准。期望座椅靠背位置可以是第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200的直立位置。在各种示例中,第一布置392可以是放松布置。Referring again to FIG. 40 , the first desired rail position of the first seat assembly 332 may cause the distance between the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 to decrease. Additionally, the first desired rail position of the first seat assembly 332 may cause the distance between the first seat assembly 332 and the third seat assembly 340 to decrease. In various examples, method 1364 may include activating a rotation actuator of first seat assembly 332 such that first seat assembly 332 rotates about its vertical axis 268 toward third seat assembly 340 . In some examples, method 1364 may include activating the second translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 to actuate the second seat assembly 336 along the rail system 316 in a vehicle rearward direction to move the second seat assembly 336 . The chair assembly 336 is positioned at the second desired rail location. In various examples, the second desired seating position of the second seat assembly 336 may be a stowed-up position of the seat 204 . In various examples, the first arrangement is an inlet/outlet arrangement. Method 1364 also includes activating the first seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 with the first desired seat position in response to the first seat position difference. alignment. In some examples, the first desired seating position is a deployed-down position of the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 . In various examples, first arrangement 392 may be a cargo arrangement. In some examples, first arrangement 392 is a design arrangement. In various examples, method 1364 includes detecting a current seatback position of seatback 200 of first seat assembly 332 using seatback position sensor 276 . In such an example, method 1364 may further include comparing the current seat position of the first seat assembly to the first desired seat back position and determining the seat back position difference. Additionally, in such an example, method 1364 may include activating the seatback actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 to move the seatback 200 of the first seat assembly 332 in response to the seatback position difference. Align with desired seat back position. The desired seat back position may be an upright position of the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 . In various examples, first arrangement 392 may be a relaxed arrangement.
参考图41,调整车辆100的乘客舱140布置的方法1412包括步骤1416:向车辆100提供第一座椅总成332、第二座椅总成336和第三座椅总成340。第二座椅总成336定位在第一座椅总成332的后方。第三座椅总成340定位在第一座椅总成332的后方并与第二座椅总成336横向相邻。第一座椅总成332、第二座椅总成336和第三座椅总成340各自包括限定各自被配置为接收乘员的座椅表面350的座椅204和座椅靠背200。方法1412还包括步骤1418:从用户界面120接收将车辆100的乘客舱140的布置从第一布置392转变到第二布置400的请求。第一布置392可以是儿童看护布置。方法1412还包括步骤1420:利用第一导轨传感器136检测第一座椅总成332在车辆100的乘客舱140内沿着导轨系统316的第一当前导轨位置。另外,方法1412包括步骤1424:将第一座椅总成332的第一当前导轨位置与第一期望导轨位置进行比较并确定第一导轨位置差。此外,方法1412包括步骤1428,其中响应于第一导轨位置差,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的第一平移致动器184以将第一座椅总成332与第一期望导轨位置对准。方法1412还包括步骤1432:利用座椅位置传感器280检测第二座椅总成336的当前座椅位置。方法1412还包括步骤1436:将第二座椅总成336的当前座椅位置与期望座椅位置进行比较并确定座椅位置差。另外,方法1412包括步骤1438,其中响应于座椅位置差,控制器104激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172以将第二座椅总成336的座椅204与期望座椅位置对准。此外,方法1412还包括步骤1440:利用第一转动位置传感器284检测第一座椅总成332的第一当前转动位置。方法1412还包括步骤1444:将第一当前转动位置与第一期望转动位置进行比较并确定第一转动位置差。方法1412还包括步骤1448,其中响应于第一转动位置差,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的第一转动致动器180以将第一座椅总成与第一期望转动位置对准。Referring to FIG. 41 , a method 1412 of adjusting the layout of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 includes step 1416 of providing the vehicle 100 with a first seat assembly 332 , a second seat assembly 336 , and a third seat assembly 340 . The second seat assembly 336 is positioned behind the first seat assembly 332 . The third seat assembly 340 is positioned rearward of the first seat assembly 332 and laterally adjacent the second seat assembly 336 . The first seat assembly 332 , the second seat assembly 336 , and the third seat assembly 340 each include a seat 204 and a seat back 200 defining a seating surface 350 each configured to receive an occupant. Method 1412 also includes step 1418 of receiving a request from user interface 120 to transition the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 from first arrangement 392 to second arrangement 400 . The first arrangement 392 may be a childcare arrangement. Method 1412 also includes step 1420 of detecting a first current rail position of first seat assembly 332 along rail system 316 within passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 using first rail sensor 136 . Additionally, method 1412 includes step 1424 of comparing a first current rail position of the first seat assembly 332 to a first desired rail position and determining a first rail position difference. Additionally, method 1412 includes step 1428 , wherein in response to the first rail position difference, the controller 104 activates the first translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the first seat assembly 332 with the first desired rail. Position alignment. Method 1412 also includes step 1432 of using the seat position sensor 280 to detect the current seat position of the second seat assembly 336 . Method 1412 also includes step 1436 of comparing the current seat position of the second seat assembly 336 to the desired seat position and determining the seat position difference. Additionally, method 1412 includes step 1438 , wherein in response to the seat position difference, controller 104 activates seat actuator 172 of second seat assembly 336 to align the seat 204 of second seat assembly 336 with the desired seat position. Chair position alignment. In addition, the method 1412 also includes step 1440 of using the first rotational position sensor 284 to detect the first current rotational position of the first seat assembly 332 . Method 1412 also includes step 1444 of comparing the first current rotational position with the first desired rotational position and determining a first rotational position difference. Method 1412 also includes step 1448 , wherein in response to the first rotational position difference, controller 104 activates first rotational actuator 180 of first seat assembly 332 to align the first seat assembly with a first desired rotational position. allow.
再次参考图41,在各种示例中,儿童看护布置可以被限定为第二座椅总成336的座椅204处于向上收起位置并且第一座椅总成332从乘客舱140的前部区域300朝向乘客舱140的中心区域304致动,使得第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336各自定位在乘客舱140的中心区域304中。在一些示例中,儿童看护布置还可以被限定为第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268朝向第三座椅总成340旋转。在各种示例中,激活第一座椅总成332的第一平移致动器184以将第一座椅总成332与第一期望导轨位置对准的步骤1428可以包括将第一座椅总成332致动到乘客舱140的前部区域300。在一些示例中,激活第二座椅总成336的座椅致动器172以将第二座椅总成336的座椅204与期望座椅位置对准的步骤1438可以包括将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向下展开位置。在各种示例中,激活第一座椅总成332的第一转动致动器180以将第一座椅总成332与第一期望转动位置对准的步骤1448包括使第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转使得第一座椅总成332置于面向后取向。方法1412可以包括激活第二座椅总成336的第二转动致动器180以将第二座椅总成336定位于面向侧面取向。在各种示例中,方法1412可以包括利用第二导轨传感器136检测第二座椅总成336在车辆100的乘客舱140内沿着导轨系统316的第二当前导轨位置。方法1412还可以包括将第二座椅总成336的第二当前导轨位置与第二期望导轨位置进行比较并确定第二导轨位置差。方法1412还可以包括响应于第二导轨位置差,控制器104激活第二座椅总成336的第二平移致动器184以将第二座椅总成与第二期望导轨位置对准。在一些示例中,方法1412可以包括激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172以将第一座椅总成332的座椅204置于向上收起位置中。在各种示例中,激活第二座椅总成336的第二平移致动器184以将第二座椅总成336与第二期望导轨位置对准的步骤可以包括将第二座椅总成336致动到乘客舱140的前部区域300。方法1412可以包括利用座椅靠背位置传感器276检测第一座椅总成332的当前座椅靠背位置。方法1412还可以包括将第一座椅总成332的当前座椅位置与期望座椅靠背位置进行比较并确定座椅靠背位置差。方法1412还可以包括响应于座椅靠背位置差,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背致动器168以将第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200与期望座椅靠背位置对准。方法1412可以包括利用第一座椅位置传感器280检测第一座椅总成332的第一当前座椅位置。方法1412还可以包括将第一座椅总成332的第一当前座椅位置与第一期望座椅位置进行比较并确定第一座椅位置差。方法1412还可以包括响应于第一座椅位置差,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的座椅致动器172以将第一座椅总成332的座椅204与期望座椅位置对准。方法1412可以包括利用小腿支撑件位置传感器404检测第一座椅总成332的当前小腿支撑件位置。方法1412还可以包括将第一座椅总成332的当前小腿支撑件位置与期望的小腿支撑件位置进行比较并确定小腿支撑件位置差。方法1412还可以包括响应于小腿支撑件位置差,控制器104激活第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件致动器176以将第一座椅总成332的小腿支撑件208与期望小腿支撑件位置对准。Referring again to FIG. 41 , in various examples, the child care arrangement may be defined with the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 in the stowed-up position and the first seat assembly 332 removed from the forward area of the passenger compartment 140 300 is actuated toward the central region 304 of the passenger compartment 140 such that the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 are each positioned in the central region 304 of the passenger compartment 140 . In some examples, the child care arrangement may also be defined with the first seat assembly 332 rotating about its vertical axis 268 toward the third seat assembly 340 . In various examples, activating the first translation actuator 184 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the first seat assembly 332 with the first desired rail position may include moving the first seat assembly 332 to the first desired rail position. 332 is actuated to the forward area 300 of the passenger compartment 140 . In some examples, activating the seat actuator 172 of the second seat assembly 336 to align the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 with a desired seat position may include moving the second seat The seat 204 of the assembly 336 is actuated into the deployed downward position. In various examples, activating the first rotational actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the first seat assembly 332 with the first desired rotational position includes causing the first seat assembly 332 to rotate. Rotation of 332 about its vertical axis 268 places the first seat assembly 332 in a rearward-facing orientation. Method 1412 may include activating the second rotation actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 to position the second seat assembly 336 in a side-facing orientation. In various examples, method 1412 may include detecting a second current rail position of second seat assembly 336 along rail system 316 within passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 using second rail sensor 136 . Method 1412 may also include comparing a second current rail position of the second seat assembly 336 to a second desired rail position and determining a second rail position difference. The method 1412 may also include, in response to the second rail position difference, the controller 104 activating the second translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 to align the second seat assembly with the second desired rail position. In some examples, method 1412 may include activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 to place the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 in the stowed-up position. In various examples, activating the second translation actuator 184 of the second seat assembly 336 to align the second seat assembly 336 with the second desired rail position may include moving the second seat assembly 336 to the second desired rail position. 336 is actuated to the forward area 300 of the passenger compartment 140 . Method 1412 may include detecting a current seatback position of first seat assembly 332 using seatback position sensor 276 . Method 1412 may also include comparing the current seat position of the first seat assembly 332 to the desired seat back position and determining the seat back position difference. The method 1412 may also include, in response to the seat back position difference, the controller 104 activating the seat back actuator 168 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 with the desired seat. Alignment of backrest position. Method 1412 may include detecting a first current seat position of first seat assembly 332 using first seat position sensor 280 . Method 1412 may also include comparing a first current seat position of the first seat assembly 332 to a first desired seat position and determining a first seat position difference. The method 1412 may also include, in response to the first seat position difference, the controller 104 activating the seat actuator 172 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 with the desired seat position. alignment. Method 1412 may include detecting a current lower leg support position of the first seat assembly 332 using the lower leg support position sensor 404 . Method 1412 may also include comparing the current lower leg support position of the first seat assembly 332 to the desired lower leg support position and determining the lower leg support position difference. The method 1412 may also include, in response to the calf support position difference, the controller 104 activating the calf support actuator 176 of the first seat assembly 332 to align the calf support 208 of the first seat assembly 332 with the desired calf support. Align the position of the parts.
参考图42,调整车辆100的乘客舱140布置的方法1452包括步骤1456:为车辆100提供在其地板320中的导轨系统316;第一座椅总成332,所述第一座椅总成联接到导轨系统316;第二座椅总成336,所述第二座椅总成联接到导轨系统316并定位在第一座椅总成332的后方;以及第一轨道传感器160,所述第一轨道传感器具有朝向导轨系统316的定位在第一座椅总成332与第二座椅总成336之间的一部分取向的第一感测区域。方法1452还包括步骤1460:从用户界面120接收请求信号以调整第一座椅总成332与第二座椅总成336之间的距离。方法1452还包括步骤1464:在第一感测区域内进行感测并确定第一感测区域内存在第一障碍。另外,方法1452包括步骤1468:将通知从控制器104传输到用户界面120使得用户被通知第一障碍。Referring to Figure 42, a method 1452 of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 includes the step 1456 of providing the vehicle 100 with a rail system 316 in its floor 320; a first seat assembly 332 to which the first seat assembly 332 is coupled. to the rail system 316; a second seat assembly 336 coupled to the rail system 316 and positioned rearward of the first seat assembly 332; and a first track sensor 160, the first The track sensor has a first sensing area oriented toward a portion of the track system 316 positioned between the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 . Method 1452 also includes step 1460 of receiving a request signal from user interface 120 to adjust the distance between first seat assembly 332 and second seat assembly 336 . The method 1452 also includes step 1464 of sensing in the first sensing area and determining that a first obstacle exists in the first sensing area. Additionally, method 1452 includes step 1468 of transmitting a notification from controller 104 to user interface 120 such that the user is notified of the first obstacle.
再次参考图42,方法1452可以包括指示用户移除第一障碍以调整第一座椅总成332与第二座椅总成336之间的距离。在一些示例中,方法1452可以包括在控制器104处阻止指令信号,直到已经移除第一障碍。在各种示例中,方法1452可以包括在第一感测区域内进行感测并确定不存在第一障碍。在一些示例中,第一轨道传感器160定位在第一座椅总成332的朝向第二座椅总成336取向的第一部分中。在各种示例中,方法1452可以包括向第二轨道传感器160提供第二感测区域,所述第二感测区域朝向导轨系统316的定位在第一座椅总成332的车辆前方的一部分取向。在一些示例中,第二轨道传感器160定位在第一座椅总成332的第二部分中,所述第二部分朝向导轨系统316的定位在第一座椅总成332的车辆前方的一部分取向。在各种示例中,方法1452可以包括在第二感测区域内进行感测并确定第二感测区域内存在第二障碍。在一些示例中,方法1452可以包括在控制器104处阻止指令信号,直到已经移除第二障碍。在各种示例中,方法1452可以包括在第二感测区域内进行感测并确定不存在第二障碍。虽然被称为第一障碍和第二障碍,但是此类术语不应被解释为限制本公开。更确切地,在本说明书中为了清楚起见和便于理解而使用术语第一障碍和第二障碍。此外,可以设想,每个轨道传感器160可以检测到多于一个障碍。此外,可以设想,轨道传感器160可以被配置为在多于一个位置中同时监测或感测。在一些示例中,第一轨道传感器160定位在乘客舱140的上部区域的第一部分中。在各种示例中,第二轨道传感器160定位在乘客舱140的上部区域的第二部分中。Referring again to FIG. 42 , method 1452 may include instructing the user to remove the first obstacle to adjust the distance between the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 . In some examples, method 1452 may include blocking the instruction signal at controller 104 until the first obstacle has been removed. In various examples, method 1452 may include sensing within the first sensing area and determining that the first obstacle is not present. In some examples, the first track sensor 160 is positioned in a first portion of the first seat assembly 332 that is oriented toward the second seat assembly 336 . In various examples, method 1452 may include providing a second sensing area to second track sensor 160 oriented toward a portion of track system 316 positioned vehicle forward of first seat assembly 332 . In some examples, the second track sensor 160 is positioned in a second portion of the first seat assembly 332 that is oriented toward a portion of the track system 316 that is positioned vehicle forward of the first seat assembly 332 . In various examples, method 1452 may include sensing within a second sensing area and determining that a second obstacle is present within the second sensing area. In some examples, method 1452 may include blocking the instruction signal at controller 104 until the second obstacle has been removed. In various examples, method 1452 may include sensing within the second sensing area and determining that the second obstacle is not present. Although referred to as first barrier and second barrier, such terms should not be construed as limiting the present disclosure. Rather, the terms first barrier and second barrier are used in this specification for the sake of clarity and ease of understanding. Additionally, it is contemplated that each track sensor 160 may detect more than one obstacle. Additionally, it is contemplated that track sensor 160 may be configured to monitor or sense in more than one location simultaneously. In some examples, the first track sensor 160 is positioned in a first portion of the upper region of the passenger compartment 140 . In various examples, the second track sensor 160 is positioned in a second portion of the upper region of the passenger compartment 140 .
参考图43,调整车辆100的乘客舱140的方法1472包括步骤1476:为车辆100提供在其地板320中的导轨系统316;第一座椅总成332,所述第一座椅总成联接到导轨系统316;第二座椅总成336,所述第二座椅总成联接到导轨系统316并定位在第一座椅总成332的后方;以及成像器132,所述成像器安装在车辆100上,其中成像器132的视野朝向车辆外部环境取向。方法1472还包括步骤1480:用成像器132收集预期用户的图像。方法1472还包括步骤1484,其中响应于预期用户的收集的图像,控制器104调整乘客舱140的布置。乘客舱140的调整可以通过致动从第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336中选择的至少一个座椅总成来实现。Referring to Figure 43, a method 1472 of adjusting a passenger compartment 140 of a vehicle 100 includes the steps 1476 of providing the vehicle 100 with a rail system 316 in its floor 320; a first seat assembly 332 coupled to rail system 316; a second seat assembly 336 coupled to the rail system 316 and positioned rearward of the first seat assembly 332; and an imager 132 mounted on the vehicle 100 , wherein the field of view of the imager 132 is oriented toward the environment external to the vehicle. Method 1472 also includes step 1480 of collecting an image of the intended user with imager 132 . The method 1472 also includes step 1484 in which the controller 104 adjusts the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 in response to the collected images of the intended user. Adjustment of the passenger compartment 140 may be accomplished by actuating at least one seat assembly selected from the first seat assembly 332 and the second seat assembly 336 .
再次参考图43,方法1472可以包括从预期用户的收集的图像识别第一用户和第二用户,第二用户的身材比第一用户小。方法1472还可以包括激活第二座椅总成336的转动致动器180,使得第二座椅总成336被置于面向侧面取向。在一些示例中,方法1472包括处理收集的预期用户的图像并识别第一用户携带第二用户。在各种示例中,方法1472包括处理收集的预期用户的图像并识别第一用户握着第二用户的手。在一些示例中,处理收集的预期用户的图像的步骤可以包括估计第二用户的身高并通过参考数据库基于身高来推断第二用户的年龄。在各种示例中,数据库可以存储在控制器104的存储器112内。在一些示例中,方法1472可以包括处理收集的预期用户的图像,识别预期用户持有的货物物品,将第一座椅总成332的座椅204致动到向上收起位置,将第一座椅总成332朝向导轨系统316的最前方致动,将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向上收起位置,以及将第二座椅总成336朝向导轨系统316的最前方致动。在各种示例中,预期用户持有的货物物品被识别为由预期用户携带的一个或多个袋。在一些示例中,方法1472包括处理收集的预期用户的图像并将预期用户识别为包括多个乘员。在各种示例中,方法1472包括将第二座椅总成336的座椅204致动到向上收起位置并在车辆向前方向上沿着导轨系统316致动第二座椅总成336。在一些示例中,方法1472包括使第一座椅总成332围绕其竖直轴线268旋转以将第一座椅总成332置于面向后取向。Referring again to Figure 43, method 1472 may include identifying a first user and a second user from collected images of prospective users, the second user being smaller in stature than the first user. Method 1472 may also include activating the rotation actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 such that the second seat assembly 336 is placed in a side-facing orientation. In some examples, method 1472 includes processing the collected images of the intended user and identifying the first user carrying the second user. In various examples, method 1472 includes processing the collected images of the intended user and identifying the first user holding the hand of the second user. In some examples, processing the collected images of the intended user may include estimating the height of the second user and inferring the age of the second user based on the height by referring to a database. In various examples, the database may be stored within memory 112 of controller 104 . In some examples, method 1472 may include processing the collected images of the intended user, identifying cargo items held by the intended user, actuating the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 to the stowed-up position, moving the first seat Actuating the chair assembly 332 toward the forwardmost position of the rail system 316 actuates the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 to the upward stowed position, and actuating the second seat assembly 336 toward the forwardmost position of the rail system 316 actuation. In various examples, the cargo item held by the intended user is identified as one or more bags carried by the intended user. In some examples, method 1472 includes processing the collected images of the intended user and identifying the intended user as including multiple occupants. In various examples, method 1472 includes actuating the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 to a stowed upward position and actuating the second seat assembly 336 along the rail system 316 in a vehicle forward direction. In some examples, method 1472 includes rotating first seat assembly 332 about its vertical axis 268 to place first seat assembly 332 in a rearward-facing orientation.
参考图44,在各种示例中,处理在步骤1480处收集的预期用户的图像的方法1488可以包括处理收集的预期用户的图像的步骤1492。在处理收集的预期用户的图像时,决策点1496可以确定是否已经在收集的图像中识别出多个用户。另外,在处理预期用户的图像时,决策点1500可以确定是否已经在收集的图像中识别出预期用户持有的货物物品。在其中对收集的预期用户的图像的处理在决策点1496处未识别出多个用户但是在决策点1500处识别出预期用户持有的货物物品的示例中,可以在步骤1504将乘客舱140的布置调整到货物布置。在其中对收集的预期用户的图像的处理在决策点1496处未识别出多个用户并且在决策点1500处未识别出预期用户持有的货物物品的示例中,可以在步骤1508将乘客舱140的布置维持处于当前布置。在各种示例中,乘客舱140的布置可以默认为在前一用户下车完成之后的设计布置。因此,当前布置可以是设计布置。在一些示例中,乘客舱140的布置可以默认为在前一用户下车完成之后的社交布置。因此,当前布置可以是社交布置。在其中对收集的预期用户的图像的处理识别出多个用户的示例中,可以采用决策点1512来确定多个用户中的一者是否可能是儿童。例如,多个用户中的一者可以握着多个用户中的另一者的手,其中多个用户中的另一者的身材比多个用户中的一者小。在另一个示例中,多个用户中的一者可以携带多个用户中的另一者,其中多个用户中的另一者的身材比多个用户中的一者小。如果控制器104在决策点1512处确定在多个用户中可能不存在儿童,则在步骤1508处可以将乘客舱140的布置维持处于当前布置。如果控制器104在决策点1512处确定多个用户中可能存在儿童,则可以处理预期用户的收集的图像以在步骤1516处估计被确定为可能是儿童的身材较小的用户的身高。例如,成像器132可以在其视野内进行校准和/或提供参考测量值,以用于估计用户的身高。Referring to FIG. 44 , in various examples, the method 1488 of processing the image of the prospective user collected at step 1480 may include the step 1492 of processing the collected image of the prospective user. When processing collected images of prospective users, decision point 1496 may determine whether multiple users have been identified in the collected images. Additionally, when processing images of the intended user, decision point 1500 may determine whether the goods items held by the intended user have been identified in the collected images. In an example where processing of collected images of intended users does not identify multiple users at decision point 1496 but identifies cargo items held by the intended users at decision point 1500 , the passenger compartment 140 may be removed at step 1504 The layout is adjusted to the cargo layout. In an example in which processing of collected images of intended users does not identify multiple users at decision point 1496 and does not identify cargo items held by the intended users at decision point 1500 , the passenger compartment 140 may be removed at step 1508 The layout remains in the current layout. In various examples, the layout of the passenger compartment 140 may default to the layout designed after the previous user has completed exiting the vehicle. Therefore, the current arrangement may be the design arrangement. In some examples, the layout of the passenger compartment 140 may default to a social layout after the previous user has completed exiting the vehicle. Therefore, the current placement may be a social placement. In examples where processing of collected images of prospective users identifies multiple users, decision point 1512 may be employed to determine whether one of the multiple users is likely to be a child. For example, one of the plurality of users may hold the hand of another of the plurality of users, where the other of the plurality of users is smaller in stature than the one of the plurality of users. In another example, one of the plurality of users may carry another of the plurality of users, wherein the other of the plurality of users is smaller in stature than the one of the plurality of users. If the controller 104 determines at decision point 1512 that there may be no children among the plurality of users, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 may be maintained at the current arrangement at step 1508 . If the controller 104 determines at decision point 1512 that there may be children among the plurality of users, the collected images of the prospective users may be processed to estimate the heights of smaller users determined to be likely children at step 1516 . For example, imager 132 may be calibrated within its field of view and/or provide reference measurements for use in estimating a user's height.
再次参考图44,在步骤1516处获得身材较小的用户的估计身高时,可以在步骤1520处对照数据库参考估计身高。在各种示例中,数据库可以存储在控制器104的存储器112内。在一些示例中,数据库可以存储在控制器104外部,其中控制器104通信地耦合到数据库。在各种示例中,数据库可以是由医生利用的生长曲线表(例如,疾病控制和预防中心生长曲线表、世界卫生组织生长曲线表、具有身高信息作为输入的用户配置文件等)。当在步骤1520处参考数据库时,控制器104可以在步骤1524处基于估计的身高和包含在数据库内的信息来推断身材较小的用户的年龄。一旦在步骤1534处推断出身材较小的用户的年龄,控制器104就可以在决策点1528处将推断的年龄和/或身高与预定阈值进行比较。预定阈值可以通过一个或多个乘员安全建议或标准来确定。如果控制器104在决策点1528处确定身材较小的用户低于预定阈值,则可以在步骤1532处将乘客舱140的布置调整为儿童座椅布置。替代地,如果控制器104在决策点1528处确定身材较小的用户不低于预定阈值,则可以在步骤1508处将乘客舱140的布置维持处于当前布置。Referring again to Figure 44, when the estimated height of the smaller user is obtained at step 1516, the estimated height may be referenced against the database at step 1520. In various examples, the database may be stored within memory 112 of controller 104 . In some examples, the database may be stored external to controller 104, with controller 104 communicatively coupled to the database. In various examples, the database may be a growth chart utilized by a physician (eg, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention growth chart, World Health Organization growth chart, user profile with height information as input, etc.). When referring to the database at step 1520, the controller 104 may infer the age of the smaller user based on the estimated height and information contained within the database at step 1524. Once the age of the smaller user is inferred at step 1534, the controller 104 may compare the inferred age and/or height to a predetermined threshold at decision point 1528. The predetermined threshold may be determined by one or more occupant safety recommendations or standards. If the controller 104 determines at decision point 1528 that the smaller user is below the predetermined threshold, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 may be adjusted to a child seat arrangement at step 1532 . Alternatively, if the controller 104 determines at decision point 1528 that the smaller user is not below the predetermined threshold, the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 may be maintained at the current arrangement at step 1508 .
参考图45,调整车辆100的乘客舱140布置的方法1536包括步骤1540:向车辆100提供第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336,第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336各自可移动地联接到车辆100的乘客舱140内的导轨系统316,并且第一座椅总成332和第二座椅总成336各自包括座椅204和座椅靠背200。方法1536还包括步骤1544:利用第一导轨传感器136检测第一座椅总成332的第一导轨位置。方法1536还包括步骤1548:利用第一座椅位置传感器280检测第一座椅总成332的座椅204的第一座椅位置。另外,方法1536还包括步骤1552:利用第一座椅靠背位置传感器276检测第一座椅总成332的座椅靠背200的第一座椅靠背位置。此外,方法1536包括步骤1556:利用第一转动位置传感器284检测第一座椅总成332的第一转动位置。方法1536还包括步骤1560:利用第二导轨传感器136检测第二座椅总成336的第二导轨位置。方法1536还包括步骤1564:利用第二座椅位置传感器280检测第二座椅总成336的座椅204的第二座椅位置。另外,方法1536包括步骤1568:利用第二座椅靠背位置传感器276检测第二座椅总成336的座椅靠背200的第二座椅靠背位置。此外,方法1536包括步骤1572:利用第二转动位置传感器284检测第二座椅总成336的第二转动位置。方法1536还包括步骤1576:基于第一和第二导轨传感器136、第一和第二座椅位置传感器280、第一和第二座椅靠背位置传感器276以及第一和第二转动位置传感器284的检测到的位置来确定车辆100的乘客舱140的当前布置。方法1536还包括步骤1580:将车辆100的乘客舱140的当前布置传输到车辆100的预期用户的用户界面120,用户界面120在车辆100的外部。另外,方法1536包括步骤1584:从预期用户的用户界面120接收乘客舱140的期望布置。Referring to FIG. 45 , a method 1536 of adjusting the layout of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 includes step 1540 of providing a first seat assembly 332 and a second seat assembly 336 to the vehicle 100 . The seat assemblies 336 are each movably coupled to a rail system 316 within the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 , and the first and second seat assemblies 332 and 336 each include a seat 204 and a seat back 200 . Method 1536 also includes step 1544 of detecting the first rail position of the first seat assembly 332 using the first rail sensor 136 . Method 1536 also includes step 1548 of detecting a first seat position of the seat 204 of the first seat assembly 332 using the first seat position sensor 280 . In addition, method 1536 also includes step 1552 of using the first seat back position sensor 276 to detect the first seat back position of the seat back 200 of the first seat assembly 332 . Additionally, method 1536 includes step 1556 of detecting a first rotational position of first seat assembly 332 using first rotational position sensor 284 . Method 1536 also includes step 1560 of detecting the second rail position of the second seat assembly 336 using the second rail sensor 136 . Method 1536 also includes step 1564 of detecting a second seat position of the seat 204 of the second seat assembly 336 using the second seat position sensor 280 . Additionally, method 1536 includes step 1568 of detecting a second seat back position of the seat back 200 of the second seat assembly 336 using the second seat back position sensor 276 . Additionally, method 1536 includes step 1572 of detecting a second rotational position of the second seat assembly 336 using the second rotational position sensor 284 . Method 1536 also includes step 1576 of determining based on first and second rail sensors 136 , first and second seat position sensors 280 , first and second seat back position sensors 276 , and first and second rotational position sensors 284 The detected position is used to determine the current arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 . The method 1536 also includes the step 1580 of transmitting the current arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 of the vehicle 100 to the user interface 120 of the intended user of the vehicle 100 , the user interface 120 being external to the vehicle 100 . Additionally, method 1536 includes step 1584 of receiving a desired arrangement of passenger compartment 140 from the intended user's user interface 120 .
再次参考图45,方法1536可以包括利用第一小腿支撑件位置传感器404检测第一座椅总成332的第一小腿支撑件208的第一当前小腿支撑件位置。在一些示例中,方法1536可以包括利用第二小腿支撑件位置传感器404检测第二座椅总成336的第二小腿支撑件208的第二小腿支撑件位置。在各种示例中,方法1536可以包括将乘客舱140的布置从当前布置调整到期望布置。在一些示例中,方法1536包括激活从第一座椅总成332的第一平移致动器184、第二座椅总成336的第二平移致动器184、第一座椅总成332的第一座椅致动器172、第二座椅总成336的第二座椅致动器172、第一座椅总成332的第一座椅靠背致动器168、第二座椅总成336的第二座椅靠背致动器168、第一座椅总成332的第一转动致动器180以及第二座椅总成336的第二转动致动器180中选择的至少一个致动器。在各种示例中,可以在车辆100运动时实现从当前布置到期望布置的调整。在一些示例中,期望布置是当前布置。即,可以设想其中乘客舱140的当前布置无需调整就被预期用户接受的情况。在各种示例中,方法1536可以包括利用定位在车辆100上的占用传感器156检测车辆100的乘客舱140的占用状态。方法1536可以包括在将乘客舱140的布置从当前布置转变到期望布置之前确定乘客舱140没有乘员。在一些示例中,占用传感器156是定位在乘客舱140的上部区域中的成像器132,其中成像器132的视野朝向乘客舱140取向。在各种示例中,占用传感器156包括定位在第一座椅总成332内的第一占用传感器156和定位在第二座椅总成336内的第二占用传感器156。Referring again to FIG. 45 , method 1536 may include detecting a first current lower leg support position of first lower leg support 208 of first seat assembly 332 using first lower leg support position sensor 404 . In some examples, method 1536 may include detecting a second lower leg support position of second lower leg support 208 of second seat assembly 336 using second lower leg support position sensor 404 . In various examples, method 1536 may include adjusting the arrangement of passenger compartment 140 from a current arrangement to a desired arrangement. In some examples, method 1536 includes activating first translation actuator 184 of first seat assembly 332 , second translation actuator 184 of second seat assembly 336 , first seat assembly 332 First seat actuator 172, second seat actuator 172 of second seat assembly 336, first seat back actuator 168 of first seat assembly 332, second seat assembly Actuation of at least one selected from the second seatback actuator 168 of 336, the first rotational actuator 180 of the first seat assembly 332, and the second rotational actuator 180 of the second seat assembly 336 device. In various examples, adjustment from a current arrangement to a desired arrangement may be accomplished while vehicle 100 is in motion. In some examples, the desired placement is the current placement. That is, a situation is conceivable in which the current arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 is accepted by the intended user without adjustment. In various examples, method 1536 may include detecting an occupancy status of passenger compartment 140 of vehicle 100 using occupancy sensor 156 positioned on vehicle 100 . Method 1536 may include determining that the passenger compartment 140 is empty of occupants before transitioning the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the current arrangement to the desired arrangement. In some examples, occupancy sensor 156 is an imager 132 positioned in an upper region of passenger compartment 140 , with the field of view of imager 132 oriented toward passenger compartment 140 . In various examples, occupancy sensor 156 includes a first occupancy sensor 156 positioned within first seat assembly 332 and a second occupancy sensor 156 positioned within second seat assembly 336 .
虽然已经详细讨论了将乘客舱140的布置从第一布置调整到第二布置的具体示例,但是本公开不仅限于这些调整。更确切地,在本公开的辅助下,本领域技术人员将能够确定从第一布置转变到第二布置所需的调整,所述调整在本文讨论的示例性调整中未具体概述。类似地,本领域技术人员将能够确定到达本文未具体概述的乘客舱140的定制布置所需的调整。因此,此类调整和/或布置在本公开的范围内。Although specific examples of adjusting the arrangement of the passenger compartment 140 from the first arrangement to the second arrangement have been discussed in detail, the present disclosure is not limited to these adjustments. Rather, with the aid of this disclosure, those skilled in the art will be able to determine the adjustments required to transition from the first arrangement to the second arrangement that are not specifically outlined in the exemplary adjustments discussed herein. Similarly, one skilled in the art will be able to determine the adjustments required to arrive at a customized arrangement of passenger compartment 140 not specifically outlined herein. Accordingly, such adaptations and/or arrangements are within the scope of the present disclosure.
本领域技术人员以及制造或使用本文公开的概念的人员将想到本公开的修改。因此,应当理解,附图中示出的和上面描述的实施例仅用于说明性目的,并不意图限制本公开的范围,本公开的范围由根据专利法原理(包括等同原则)解释的以下权利要求限定。Modifications of the present disclosure will occur to those skilled in the art and to those who make or use the concepts disclosed herein. Accordingly, it is to be understood that the embodiments illustrated in the drawings and described above are for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to limit the scope of the present disclosure, which is to be interpreted in accordance with the principles of patent law, including the doctrine of equivalents. Claim limitations.
本领域普通技术人员将理解,所描述的概念和其他部件的构造不限于任何具体材料。除非本文另有说明,否则本文公开的概念的其他示例性实施例可由多种材料形成。Those of ordinary skill in the art will understand that the concepts described and construction of other components are not limited to any specific materials. Unless otherwise indicated herein, other exemplary embodiments of the concepts disclosed herein may be formed from a variety of materials.
出于本公开的目的,术语“联接”(以其所有形式:联接、联接的、被联接的等)通常意指两个部件(电气的或机械的)彼此直接或间接地连接。这种连接本质上可以是固定的或者本质上是可移动的。这种连接可以利用两个部件(电气的或机械的)达成,并且任何附加的中间构件可以彼此或与两个部件一体地形成为单个整体。除非另有说明,否则这种连接本质上可以是永久性的,或者本质上可以是可移除的或可释放的。For the purposes of this disclosure, the term "coupled" (in all its forms: coupled, coupled, coupled, etc.) generally means that two components (electrical or mechanical) are directly or indirectly connected to each other. This connection may be fixed in nature or removable in nature. This connection may be made using two components (electrical or mechanical), and any additional intermediate members may be formed integrally with each other or with the two components as a single entity. Unless otherwise stated, such connections may be permanent in nature, or may be removable or releasable in nature.
同样重要的是要注意,如示例性实施例中所示的本公开的元件的构造和布置仅是说明性的。尽管在本公开中已经详细地描述了本创新的仅若干实施例,但查阅本公开的本领域的技术人员将容易理解,在实质上不脱离所叙述的主题的新颖教导和优点的情况下,许多修改是可能的(例如,各种元件的大小、尺寸、结构、形状和比例、参数的值、安装布置、材料使用、颜色、取向等的变化)。例如,示出为一体地形成的元件可由多个零件构成,或者示出为多个零件的元件可一体地形成,接口的操作可颠倒或以其他方式变化,系统的结构和/或构件或连接器或其他元件的长度或宽度可以变化,并且设置于元件之间的调整位置的性质或数量可变化。应注意的是,系统的元件和/或总成可以由提供足够强度或耐用性的多种材料中的任何一种以各种颜色、纹理和组合中的任何一种构成。因此,所有此类修改意图被包括在本创新的范围内。在不脱离本创新的精神的情况下,可在期望的示例性实施例和其他示例性实施例的设计、工况和布置方面进行其他替换、修改、改变和省略。It is also important to note that the construction and arrangement of elements of the present disclosure as shown in the exemplary embodiments are illustrative only. Although only a few embodiments of the present innovations have been described in detail in this disclosure, those skilled in the art, upon review of this disclosure, will readily appreciate that without materially departing from the novel teachings and advantages of the recited subject matter, Many modifications are possible (e.g. changes in size, dimensions, structure, shape and proportions of various elements, values of parameters, mounting arrangements, use of materials, colors, orientations, etc.). For example, elements shown as integrally formed may be constructed of multiple parts, or elements shown as multiple parts may be integrally formed, the operation of the interfaces may be reversed or otherwise varied, the structure and/or components or connections of the system may be The length or width of the device or other elements may vary, and the nature or number of adjustment locations provided between elements may vary. It should be noted that the elements and/or assemblies of the system may be constructed of any of a variety of materials that provide sufficient strength or durability, in any of a variety of colors, textures, and combinations. Accordingly, all such modifications are intended to be included within the scope of this innovation. Other substitutions, modifications, changes and omissions may be made in the design, operating conditions and arrangements of the desired exemplary embodiments and other exemplary embodiments without departing from the spirit of the invention.
应当理解,任何所描述的过程或所描述的过程内的步骤可以与其他公开的过程或步骤组合以形成本公开范围内的结构。本文公开的示例性结构和过程用于说明性目的,而不应解释为限制性。It should be understood that any described process or step within a described process may be combined with other disclosed processes or steps to form structures within the scope of the present disclosure. The exemplary structures and processes disclosed herein are for illustrative purposes and should not be construed as limiting.
还应当理解,在不脱离本公开的概念的情况下,可以对前述结构和方法进行变化和修改,并且还应当理解,此类概念意图由所附权利要求覆盖,除非这些权利要求以其语言以其他方式明确说明。It is also to be understood that changes and modifications may be made to the foregoing structures and methods without departing from the concepts of the present disclosure, and it is further to be understood that such concepts are intended to be covered by the appended claims, unless such claims are language by which Other ways are clearly stated.
Claims (20)
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202210462900.2A CN117002343A (en) | 2022-04-28 | 2022-04-28 | Remote notification and adjustment of passenger cabin layout |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202210462900.2A CN117002343A (en) | 2022-04-28 | 2022-04-28 | Remote notification and adjustment of passenger cabin layout |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CN117002343A true CN117002343A (en) | 2023-11-07 |
Family
ID=88574894
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202210462900.2A Pending CN117002343A (en) | 2022-04-28 | 2022-04-28 | Remote notification and adjustment of passenger cabin layout |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN117002343A (en) |
-
2022
- 2022-04-28 CN CN202210462900.2A patent/CN117002343A/en active Pending
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11904732B2 (en) | Vehicular system capable of adjusting a passenger compartment from a first arrangement to a child care arrangement | |
| US11772519B2 (en) | Vehicular system capable of adjusting a passenger compartment from a first arrangement to a child seat arrangement | |
| US11155185B2 (en) | Control of a seating arrangement | |
| CN102328605B (en) | Vehicle-seat control apparatus | |
| US8398356B2 (en) | Automotive wheelchair mobility system | |
| US20110109114A1 (en) | Seat for a vehicle | |
| CN107264344A (en) | Vehicle seat assembly and method of storage | |
| CN113291212A (en) | Armrest apparatus of vehicle having various rotation angles and operation control method thereof | |
| WO2014010364A1 (en) | Seat device for vehicle driver seat | |
| CN113799671A (en) | A control method for electrically adjusting the armrest of a car seat | |
| US20250178488A1 (en) | Exterior imager utilized in adjusting a passenger compartment arrangement | |
| US12077068B2 (en) | Authorization-based adjustment of passenger compartment arrangement | |
| US11731535B2 (en) | Vehicular system capable of adjusting a passenger compartment from a child care arrangement to a second arrangement | |
| US20220144141A1 (en) | Vehicular system capable of adjusting a passenger compartment arrangement | |
| US11772520B2 (en) | Remote notification and adjustment of a passenger compartment arrangement | |
| US11772517B2 (en) | Vehicular system capable of adjusting a passenger compartment from a child seat arrangement to a second arrangement | |
| CN117002343A (en) | Remote notification and adjustment of passenger cabin layout | |
| CN117002339A (en) | Vehicle system capable of adjusting the passenger compartment from a first arrangement to a child seat arrangement | |
| CN117002340A (en) | Vehicle system capable of adjusting passenger compartment from child seat arrangement to second arrangement | |
| CN117002342A (en) | Vehicle system capable of adjusting passenger compartment from first arrangement to child care arrangement | |
| CN117002345A (en) | Vehicle system capable of adjusting passenger cabin arrangement | |
| CN117002341A (en) | External imager for adjusting passenger cabin arrangement | |
| CN117002344A (en) | Authorization-based passenger cabin arrangement adjustment | |
| CN117002338A (en) | Vehicle system capable of adjusting passenger compartment from child care arrangement to second arrangement | |
| KR20230093585A (en) | Seat for vehicle |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination |